You are on page 1of 262

3D Modeling Tool

A collaborative network enabled and desktop CAD software system

3D Modeling Tool
A collaborative network enabled and desktop CAD software system

1.1.1 CollabCAD Group, NIC


Atal Innovation Mission (AIM), NITI Aayog is the flagship initiative of
Government of India with the goal to support innovation and
entrepreneurship within the ecosystem. With a huge demographic dividend
that India has, it is imperative to tap into the young talent which will steer
our country to higher achievements. At school level, to foster creativity and
innovation, AIM is setting up state-of-the art Atal Tinkering Labs (ATLs).
These ATLs are equipped with 21st century technologies such as IoT,
electronics, rapid prototyping tools, 3D printers and many more.

SHRI The philosophy of the ATL initiative is not just to ideate innovative solutions
RAMANATHAN but to innovate and productize them as well. A solution which can be realized
RAMANAN in the real world is the solution that we need. AIM, NITI Aayog, has
Mission Director strategically placed these tools to enable and empower students not only to
ATAL INNOVATION design but implement their grassroot innovations. It is thus natural for AIM,
MISSION NITI Aayog to partner with CollabCAD team at National Informatics Centre
NITI Aayog and bring a homegrown 3D Design Software created by and for our fellow
Indians.

AIM, through its curriculum, content and various events and activities is
keeping its teachers, students, parents and mentors engaged in inculcating
an innovative mindset within them. As a part of this, AIM collaborates with
various stakeholders from the Government, Industry and Academia. We are
proud to work closely with MEITY’s NIC - CollabCAD to identify the 3D
Design needs of our audience and bring this module to you.

Great design precedes great innovations. 3D design is an important aspect to


any innovation particularly using 3D printers. It is basically the first step
towards digital design and manufacturing. At this time and age, Rapid
Prototyping is the key to agile manufacturing processes. The 3D Design
process enables us to make multiple iterations to arrive at the final product
through a quick, robust quality process, saving time and resources. 3D
design-based manufacturing would be integral to creating engineering
marvels.

I congratulate the CollabCAD, NIC and ATL, AIM team members – Dr. Savita
Dawar, Mr. G. Prasad, Ms. Richa Tiwari, Ms. Vishnu Priya Bijapur, Mr.
Saksham Saxena, and Mr. Ronak Jogeshwar who have produced a refined and
easy to use module to learn 3D design using CollabCAD software.

I am sure that our ATL students and teachers will leverage this module to
sharpen their 3D design skills. This module will lay a foundational
understanding of Design and will benefit at all – school, college, vocational
and polytechnic levels. I am sure that I will witness well designed and
engineered prototypes and products in the near future by our ATL
beneficiaries.

Happy Tinkering 😊

(R. Ramanan)
CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Abstract
This e-Book will give an overview on CollabCAD, a ‘Make in India’ 3D CAD Software designed
and developed by National Informatics Centre, New Delhi using open-source software libraries.
This software is a collaborative initiative of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC), Vikram
Sarabhai Space Centre (VSSC) and National Informatics Centre (NIC). This book is written
primarily for students of Atal Tinkering Labs (ATL) schools registered under Atal Innovation
Mission (AIM) of Niti Aayog, Govt Of India for building CAD models for 3D Printing. This e-book
will be beneficial at school, vocational, polytechnic and college level. Even CAD Professionals will
find this an excellent reference book for understanding CollabCAD commands and
functionalities. It is expected that this book will help all CollabCAD users to have better
understanding of the product and build skills for innovative product designs and engineering
drawings.

Keywords: 3D Modeling, CAD, 3D Visualization, 2D Drafting, Solid Modeling, Surface Modeling,


Assembly Design, Scripting Interface, 3D Printing.

Government of India

Ministry of Electronics & Information Technology

National Informatics Centre

New Delhi

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 7


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Contributors
Dr. Savita Dawar

Mr. Guntuku Prasad

Ms. Richa Tiwari

November 2020

Version 1.0

ISBN 978-81-909457-4-5

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of NIC.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 8


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Abbreviations
AIM Atal Innovation Mission
ATL Atal Tinkering Labs
CAD Computer Aided Designing
IGES Initial Graphics Exchange Specification for 3D Geometry transfer
MUA Multiuser ZIP for saving CollabCAD Assembly data
MUP Multiuser ZIP for saving CollabCAD Plot (2D Drawing) data
MUZ Multiuser Zip for saving CollabCAD Part data
NIC National Informatics Centre
PLM Product Lifecycle Management IT tools for Enterprise
STEP STandard for Exchange of Product model data of 3D CAD files
STL Stero-Lithography 3D file format for manufacturing and 3D printing
VRML Virtual Reality Markup Language 3D file format

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 9


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Table of Content
Chapter 1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 20
1.1 National Informatics Centre 20
1.2 Atal Innovative Mission (AIM) 20
1.3 AIM- CollabCAD Synergy 21
Chapter 2. About CollabCAD .................................................................................................................... 22
2.1 Introduction 22
2.2 Modeling Philosophy of CollabCAD 22
2.3 Stand-Alone and Client-Server 24
2.4 System Requirements 25
2.5 Installation 25
2.6 Getting Started with CollabCAD 26
Chapter 3. CollabCAD Workspaces and Views.................................................................................... 29
3.1 Introduction 29
3.2 Workspace 29
3.3 Views 32
3.4 3D Canvas Features 34
Chapter 4. Geometry Work Bench - Basic Entities ............................................................................ 38
4.1 Introduction 38
4.2 Point 38
4.3 Line 40
4.4 Arc 44
Chapter 5. 2D Profile and 2D Constraints ............................................................................................ 49
5.1 Introduction 49
5.2 Profile Creation for Solid and Surface modeling 49
5.3 2D Constraints 53
Chapter 6. Curves ....................................................................................................................................... 70
6.1 Introduction 70
6.2 Ellipse 70
6.3 Parabola 72
6.4 Hyperbola 72
6.5 Helix 73

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 10


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.6 Spiral 73
6.7 Involute 74
6.8 Bezier 75
6.9 B-Spline 76
6.10 Offset 84
6.11 Trim 85
6.12 Explore 89
Chapter 7. Surface Modeling ................................................................................................................... 91
7.1 Introduction 91
7.2 Basic Plane, Ruled, Cylinder, Conical Surface 91
7.3 B-Spline, Revolution, Offset and Pipe surface 94
7.4 Fillet, Chamfer 106
7.5 Explore 107
Chapter 8. Solid Modeling ..................................................................................................................... 109
8.1 Introduction 109
8.2 Box, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Torus, Coil 109
8.3 Slab 120
8.4 Revolution 123
8.5 Sweep 124
8.6 Loft 125
8.7 Boolean Operations (Union / Difference / Intersection / Trim) 126
8.8 Blend/ Chamfer 127
8.9 Solid Pattern 135
8.10 Mechanical Features 137
8.11 Mass Property Analysis 144
Chapter 9. Assembly Design and 3D Constraints ............................................................................ 146
9.1 Introduction 146
9.2 Insert 146
9.3 Mark-Up 148
9.4 3D Constraints 148
Chapter 10. Plot Configurator .............................................................................................................. 155
10.1 Introduction 155
10.2 View 155

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 11


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

10.3 Move/Modify/Delete View 157


10.4 Dimension & Symbols 158
10.5 Annotation 165
10.6 Bill of Material 168
Chapter 11. Customizing CollabCAD .................................................................................................. 169
11.1 Configurable Menu Bar 169
11.2 Configurable Tool Palette 171
11.3 Hot Keys 173
11.4 Tool Bar 174
Chapter 12. Data Exchange ................................................................................................................... 176
12.1 Import 176
12.2 Export 180
Chapter 13. Scripting Interface ........................................................................................................... 181
13.1 Jython Basics 181
13.2 CollabCAD with Jython Scripting 191
13.3 Component Library 197
Chapter 14. About CollabCAD 3D Web Viewer ................................................................................ 199
14.1 Account Creation 199
14.2 File Upload/ Share/ View 199
Chapter 15. Features of 3D Viewer ..................................................................................................... 202
15.1 Introduction 202
15.2 Model Tree 202
15.3 View 202
15.4 Primitives 203
15.5 Shading 203
15.6 Geometry Setting 204
15.7 General Setting 204
15.8 Light Settings 205
15.9 Camera Setting 205
15.10 3D Environment 206
15.11 Mesh Clipping 206
15.12 Translate/Rotate 207
15.13 Metal Material 207

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 12


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

15.14 Theme Customization 207


15.15 Other Features 207
Chapter 16. CollabCAD Desktop and Web Help .............................................................................. 208
16.1 Desktop Help 208
16.2 CollabCAD Web Help 208
Chapter 17. 3D Modeling Example: Machine Block Part .............................................................. 211
17.1 Introduction 211
17.2 Modeling Steps 211
Chapter 18. Assembly Example: Stuffing Box Assembly............................................................... 218
18.1 Introduction 218
18.2 Parts of Assembly 218
18.3 Modeling Steps 218
18.4 Assemble Stuffing Box 241
18.5 2D Drawing of Assembly in Plot Configurator 255
Chapter 19. 3D Models Designed using CollabCAD ........................................................................ 257
Chapter 20. Resources and References ............................................................................................. 261

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 13


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Main application window of CollabCAD ............................................................................................................... 24
Figure 2-2: Login to CollabCAD Server ........................................................................................................................................ 24
Figure 3-1: Parameters of Section View ...................................................................................................................................... 34
Figure 3-2: Section View of a Solid Model .................................................................................................................................. 34
Figure 3-3: Section View with background curves .................................................................................................................. 34
Figure 3-4: Local and Global Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................................... 36
Figure 4-1: Different parameters for Arc creation .................................................................................................................. 46
Figure 5-1: 2D Horizontal Constraint........................................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 5-2: 2D Vertical Constraint ................................................................................................................................................ 54
Figure 5-3: 2D Collinear Constraint.............................................................................................................................................. 55
Figure 5-4: 2D Co-radial Constraint ............................................................................................................................................. 55
Figure 5-5: Perpendicular Constraint .......................................................................................................................................... 56
Figure 5-6: Perpendicular Constraint - One entity is already constrained ..................................................................... 56
Figure 5-7: Parallel Constraint ....................................................................................................................................................... 57
Figure 5-8: Parallel Constraint - One entity is already constrained .................................................................................. 57
Figure 5-9: Tangent Constraint ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Figure 5-10: Tangent Constraint - One entity is already constrained............................................................................... 59
Figure 5-11: Concentric Constraint .............................................................................................................................................. 59
Figure 5-12: Concentric Constraint – One entity already constrained ............................................................................. 60
Figure 5-13: Coincident Constraint .............................................................................................................................................. 60
Figure 5-14: Symmetric Constraint .............................................................................................................................................. 62
Figure 5-15: Angular Constraint .................................................................................................................................................... 63
Figure 5-16: Radial Constraint ....................................................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 5-17: Colour Coding – Single Entity ................................................................................................................................ 65
Figure 5-18: Colour Coding: Two Entities - Partially Constrained ..................................................................................... 65
Figure 5-19: Colour Coding: Fully Constrained ........................................................................................................................ 66
Figure 5-20: Constraint modification........................................................................................................................................... 67
Figure 5-21: Parameters while deleting a constraint ............................................................................................................. 67
Figure 5-22: Unconstraint line entity with list of Allowable Constraints ........................................................................ 68
Figure 5-23: Partially Constrained line entity with list of Allowable Constraints ........................................................ 68
Figure 6-1: Parameters of Ellipse creation................................................................................................................................. 71
Figure 6-2: Parameters of Parabola creation ............................................................................................................................ 72
Figure 6-3: Parameters of Hyperbola creation ......................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 6-4: Parameters of Helix creation.................................................................................................................................... 73
Figure 6-5: Parameters of Spiral creation .................................................................................................................................. 74
Figure 6-6: Parameters of Involute creation ............................................................................................................................. 75
Figure 6-7: Interpolation B-spline Curve .................................................................................................................................... 78
Figure 6-8: Parameters for parametric equation ..................................................................................................................... 78
Figure 6-9: Parametric B-spline curve......................................................................................................................................... 79
Figure 6-10: Option to retain curves while concatenating B-Spline curves ................................................................... 81
Figure 6-11: Modifying poles of b-spline curve ........................................................................................................................ 82
Figure 6-12: Removing knot from B-Spline Curve................................................................................................................... 82
Figure 6-13: Modifying B-Spline Curve geometry ................................................................................................................... 83
Figure 6-14: Parameters for curve offset.................................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 6-15: One directional curve offset with sharp cornering ........................................................................................ 84
Figure 6-16: One directional curve offset with smooth cornering ..................................................................................... 84
Figure 6-17: Bi-directional curve offset with Capped Ends ................................................................................................. 85
Figure 6-18: Bi-directional curve offset without Capped Ends ........................................................................................... 85
Figure 6-19: Input curves for curves auto-split operation ................................................................................................... 88
Figure 6-20: Resultant curves after auto-split operation...................................................................................................... 89

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 14


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
Figure 7-1: Ruled Surface from set of curves ............................................................................................................................ 92
Figure 7-2: Cylinder creation using base circle ........................................................................................................................ 94
Figure 7-3: Surface Lofting with smooth type........................................................................................................................... 97
Figure 7-4: Setting B-Spline surface continuity ........................................................................................................................ 98
Figure 7-5: B-Spline surface created using edge to edge option ......................................................................................... 99
Figure 7-6: Parameters for modifying B-Spline Surface ........................................................................................................ 99
Figure 7-7: Parameters of B-Spline Surface ............................................................................................................................ 100
Figure 7-8: Revolved Surface using set of curves ................................................................................................................. 100
Figure 7-9: Surface selected for constant value offset ........................................................................................................ 102
Figure 7-10: Surface selected for variable value offset ...................................................................................................... 103
Figure 7-11: Pipe with constant circular section .................................................................................................................. 104
Figure 7-12: Constant section pipe surface............................................................................................................................. 105
Figure 7-13: Varying section pipe surface............................................................................................................................... 105
Figure 7-14: Edge Fillet - Constant radius............................................................................................................................... 106
Figure 7-15: Corner Fillet - Constant Radius .......................................................................................................................... 106
Figure 7-16: Edge Fillet - Variable Radius ............................................................................................................................... 106
Figure 7-17: Edge Chamfer ........................................................................................................................................................... 107
Figure 7-18: Multiple Chamfer .................................................................................................................................................... 107
Figure 7-19: Surface Explore options ....................................................................................................................................... 107
Figure 8-1: Key in parameters for Solid Box creation ......................................................................................................... 110
Figure 8-2: Key in parameters for Solid Cylinder creation ................................................................................................ 111
Figure 8-3: Cylinder creation using line as axis..................................................................................................................... 111
Figure 8-4: Key in parameters for Solid Cone creation ....................................................................................................... 113
Figure 8-5: Key in parameters for Solid Sphere creation ................................................................................................... 114
Figure 8-6: Key in parameters for Solid Torus ...................................................................................................................... 116
Figure 8-7: Creation of cylindrical coil ..................................................................................................................................... 118
Figure 8-8: Creation of Conical coil............................................................................................................................................ 119
Figure 8-9: Creation of Combination Coil ................................................................................................................................ 120
Figure 8-10: Slab creation with islands .................................................................................................................................... 122
Figure 8-11: Modifying underline curves of the slab ........................................................................................................... 122
Figure 8-12: Modified Slab by modifying underline curves .............................................................................................. 123
Figure 8-13: Revolved Solid ......................................................................................................................................................... 123
Figure 8-14: Sweeps - Single Section ........................................................................................................................................ 124
Figure 8-15: Sweeps - Multiple Sections .................................................................................................................................. 125
Figure 8-16: Solid loft with ruled and smooth option ......................................................................................................... 126
Figure 8-17: Partially extending surface.................................................................................................................................. 127
Figure 8-18: Fully extending surface......................................................................................................................................... 127
Figure 8-19: Partially and fully extending curves ................................................................................................................. 127
Figure 8-20: Convex and Concave blend shapes ................................................................................................................... 128
Figure 8-21: Constraint Radius Blend....................................................................................................................................... 128
Figure 8-22: Two Radii Blend ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
Figure 8-23: Parameter Radius Blend....................................................................................................................................... 129
Figure 8-24: Global blend with constant radius, two radii and parameter-radii ....................................................... 129
Figure 8-25: Edge blend with constant radius, two radii and parameter-radii .......................................................... 130
Figure 8-26: Vertex blend with constant radius, two radii and parameter-radii....................................................... 130
Figure 8-27: Blend all edges of selected face .......................................................................................................................... 131
Figure 8-28: Blend along the common edge between two selected faces .................................................................... 132
Figure 8-29: Global Chamfer ........................................................................................................................................................ 132
Figure 8-30: Edge Chamfer (Equal Distance) ......................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 8-31: Edge Chamfer (Distance-Distance)................................................................................................................... 134
Figure 8-32: Edge Chamfer (Distance-Angle) ........................................................................................................................ 134
Figure 8-33: Cylinder (reference solid) fused to the slab(base solid) in 8 instances at an angle of 45deg ....... 136

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 15


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
Figure 8-34: Extrude feature (Protrusion & Depression) .................................................................................................. 137
Figure 8-35: Hole feature .............................................................................................................................................................. 139
Figure 8-36: Rib feature - Right & Left sides of profile ....................................................................................................... 140
Figure 8-37: Slot feature................................................................................................................................................................ 142
Figure 8-38: Glue feature .............................................................................................................................................................. 143
Figure 8-39: Parameters to Solid Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 144
Figure 8-40: Solid Mass, Volume Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 144
Figure 8-41: Solid Quadratic Moments Analysis ................................................................................................................... 145
Figure 9-1: Selecting Assembly Design mode ....................................................................................................................... 146
Figure 9-2: Applying Axial Align Constraint ........................................................................................................................... 149
Figure 9-3: Applying Coplanar Constraint............................................................................................................................... 150
Figure 9-4: Applying Angular constraint ................................................................................................................................. 151
Figure 9-5: Applying Perpendicular constraint ..................................................................................................................... 151
Figure 9-6: Applying Parallel Constraint ................................................................................................................................. 152
Figure 9-7: Applying Distance constraint ................................................................................................................................ 153
Figure 9-8: Applying Tangent constraint................................................................................................................................. 153
Figure 9-9: Applying coincident constraint ............................................................................................................................ 154
Figure 10-1: Aligned and offset section view ......................................................................................................................... 155
Figure 10-2: Section View with and without back edges ................................................................................................... 156
Figure 10-3: Standard Horizontal Dimension ........................................................................................................................ 158
Figure 10-4: Chain Horizontal Dimension............................................................................................................................... 158
Figure 10-5: Stack Horizontal Dimension ............................................................................................................................... 159
Figure 10-6: Co-Ordinate Horizontal Dimension .................................................................................................................. 159
Figure 10-7: Cumulative Horizontal Dimension.................................................................................................................... 160
Figure 10-8: Standard Vertical Dimension.............................................................................................................................. 160
Figure 10-9: Chain Vertical Dimension .................................................................................................................................... 161
Figure 10-10 Stack Vertical Dimension .................................................................................................................................... 161
Figure 10-11: Co-Ordinate Vertical Dimension ..................................................................................................................... 162
Figure 10-12: Cumulative Vertical Dimension....................................................................................................................... 162
Figure 10-13: Parallel Dimension .............................................................................................................................................. 162
Figure 10-14: Radius Dimension ................................................................................................................................................ 163
Figure 10-15: Diameter Dimension ........................................................................................................................................... 163
Figure 10-16: Thickness Dimension.......................................................................................................................................... 163
Figure 10-17: Angular Dimension .............................................................................................................................................. 164
Figure 10-18: Arc Length Dimension ........................................................................................................................................ 164
Figure 10-19: Balloon Annotation.............................................................................................................................................. 166
Figure 10-20: Datum Feature ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
Figure 10-21: Surface Texture..................................................................................................................................................... 167
Figure 10-22: Feature Control Frame ....................................................................................................................................... 167
Figure 10-23: Axis line ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
Figure 10-24: Center Line ............................................................................................................................................................. 168
Figure 12-1: Information about mesh after STL import ..................................................................................................... 176
Figure 12-2: Post-processed information of BREPShape ................................................................................................... 179
Figure 12-3: Total of IGES entities read by the post-processor ....................................................................................... 179
Figure 12-4: Entity information after OBJ Import ................................................................................................................ 180
Figure 13-1: List of operators in Jython ................................................................................................................................... 183
Figure 13-2: CollabCAD Jython Interpreter ............................................................................................................................ 191
Figure 14-1: Interface for file uploading .................................................................................................................................. 200
Figure 14-2: Updating uploaded model information........................................................................................................... 200
Figure 14-3: Public Library Interface........................................................................................................................................ 201
Figure 14-4: CollabCAD 3D Viewer ............................................................................................................................................ 201
Figure 15-1: Model Tree ................................................................................................................................................................ 202

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 16


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
Figure 15-2: View Options and View Box ................................................................................................................................ 203
Figure 15-3: Types of shading ..................................................................................................................................................... 204
Figure 15-4: Effects of orthographic camera and perspective camera .......................................................................... 205
Figure 15-5: 3D Environment Mapping (Reflection and Refraction) ............................................................................. 206
Figure 15-6: Mesh Clipping .......................................................................................................................................................... 207
Figure 16-1: CollabCAD Web Help ............................................................................................................................................. 209
Figure 17-1: Setting design variables........................................................................................................................................ 211
Figure 17-2: CollabCAD Workspace .......................................................................................................................................... 211
Figure 17-3: Front View................................................................................................................................................................. 212
Figure 17-4: Line Creation dialog box....................................................................................................................................... 212
Figure 17-5: Profile curves ........................................................................................................................................................... 213
Figure 17-6: Solid Slab ................................................................................................................................................................... 213
Figure 17-7: Profile curves ........................................................................................................................................................... 213
Figure 17-8: Solid Slab ................................................................................................................................................................... 214
Figure 17-9: Selecting option Enter Coordinates .................................................................................................................. 215
Figure 17-10: Profile curve........................................................................................................................................................... 215
Figure 17-11: Union of Solid slabs ............................................................................................................................................. 216
Figure 17-12: Plot Confugurator - 2D drawing ...................................................................................................................... 217
Figure 18-1: Rectangular profile ................................................................................................................................................ 219
Figure 18-2: Solid Slab .................................................................................................................................................................. 220
Figure 18-3: Created circular slab on rectangular slab....................................................................................................... 221
Figure 18-4: Ellipse with two circles ......................................................................................................................................... 222
Figure 18-5: Union of Solid Slabs ............................................................................................................................................... 223
Figure 18-6: Boolean Difference operation............................................................................................................................. 224
Figure 18-7: Solid Object with a Cylinder for Boolean Difference .................................................................................. 224
Figure 18-8: Body: a part of the Stuffing box assembly ..................................................................................................... 225
Figure 18-9: Added required 2D Profiles................................................................................................................................. 226
Figure 18-10: Solid Slab creation ............................................................................................................................................... 227
Figure 18-11: Result of Solid Union operation ...................................................................................................................... 228
Figure 18-12: 2D Profile ................................................................................................................................................................ 229
Figure 18-13: 2D Profile for revolved solid ............................................................................................................................ 230
Figure 18-14: Inputs for creating revolved solid .................................................................................................................. 230
Figure 18-15: Revolved solid ....................................................................................................................................................... 231
Figure 18-16: Result of Boolean Difference operation........................................................................................................ 231
Figure 18-17: Edge selected to blend ........................................................................................................................................ 232
Figure 18-18: Edge to blend ......................................................................................................................................................... 232
Figure 18-19: Edges to blend in shaded mode ....................................................................................................................... 233
Figure 18-20: Gland- Part of Stuffing box assembly............................................................................................................. 233
Figure 18-21: Union of two Solid Cylinders ............................................................................................................................ 234
Figure 18-22: 2D profile ................................................................................................................................................................ 235
Figure 18-23: Dialog box while creating Revolved Solid .................................................................................................... 236
Figure 18-24: Bush - a part of Stuffing box assembly .......................................................................................................... 237
Figure 18-25: 2D Profile for Nut ................................................................................................................................................. 238
Figure 18-26: Nut - a part of Stuffing box assembly ............................................................................................................ 238
Figure 18-27: Stud- Part of Stuffing box assembly ............................................................................................................... 239
Figure 18-28: Rod- a part of stuffing box assembly ............................................................................................................. 240
Figure 18-29: Assembly design parameters ........................................................................................................................... 241
Figure 18-30: Applied fixed constraint to component 'Body' ........................................................................................... 241
Figure 18-31: Component 'Bush' inserted to Stuffing box assembly ............................................................................. 242
Figure 18-32: Aaxially aligned ‘Bush’ with ‘Body’ component ......................................................................................... 243
Figure 18-33: Inserted 'Gland' component to Stuffing box assembly ............................................................................ 243
Figure 18-34: Planer faces selected for distance constraint ............................................................................................. 244

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 17


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
Figure 18-35: Distance constraint applied .............................................................................................................................. 244
Figure 18-36: Inserted ‘Stud' component to the Stuffing box assembly ...................................................................... 245
Figure 18-37: Plane selection for applying coplanar constraint...................................................................................... 246
Figure 18-38: ‘Body’ and ‘Stud’ components are coplanar ................................................................................................ 246
Figure 18-39: Circular face selection for axial constraint .................................................................................................. 247
Figure 18-40: Stud is axially alligned with 'Body' component ......................................................................................... 247
Figure 18-41: Plane selection for applying coplanar constraint...................................................................................... 248
Figure 18-42: Circular face selection for axial constraint .................................................................................................. 249
Figure 18-43: both Stud components are axially aligned with Body Component ..................................................... 249
Figure 18-44: 'Nut' Component added to Stuffing box assembly .................................................................................... 250
Figure 18-45: Plane selection for coplanar constraint ........................................................................................................ 250
Figure 18-46: Nut component after applying coplanar constraint ................................................................................. 251
Figure 18-47: Circular face selection for axially align components ................................................................................ 251
Figure 18-48: 'Stud' and 'Nut' are axially aligned ................................................................................................................. 252
Figure 18-49: Both the 'Nut' components aligned to their respective positions ....................................................... 253
Figure 18-50: 'Rod' Component added to Stuffing box assembly ................................................................................... 253
Figure 18-51: Circular face selection for axially aligning components ......................................................................... 254
Figure 18-52: Stuffing Box Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 255
Figure 18-53: 2D Drawing sheet of Stuffing Box assembly ............................................................................................... 256

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 18


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Section 1
Modeling using
CollabCAD

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 19


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 1. Introduction

1.1 National Informatics Centre


National Informatics Centre (NIC) (https://www.nic.in/) was established in 1976 and has rich
experience in providing ICT and e-Governance support to the Government for the last 4 decades
and bridge the digital divide. It has emerged as a promoter of digital opportunities for sustainable
development. NIC spearheaded “Informatics-Led-Development” by implementing ICT
applications in social and public administration and facilitates electronic delivery of services to
the government (G2G), business (G2B), citizen (G2C) and government employee (G2E). NIC,
through its ICT Network, “NICNET”, has institutional linkages with all the Ministries
/Departments of the Central Government, 37 State Governments/ Union Territories, and about
720+ District Administrations of India.
NIC has been closely associated with the Government in different aspects of Governance besides
establishing a Nationwide State-of-the-Art ICT Infrastructure, it has also built many digital
solutions to support the government at various levels, making the last-mile delivery of
government services to the citizens a reality. CollabCAD is one of the initiatives of NIC. It is ‘Make
in India’ high end Computer Aided Designing (CAD) software.

1.2 Atal Innovative Mission (AIM)


Atal Innovation Mission (AIM) (https://aim.gov.in/index.php) is Government of India’s flagship
initiative to promote a culture of innovation and entrepreneurship in the country. AIM’s
objective is to develop new programmes and policies for fostering innovation in different sectors
of the economy, provide platform and collaboration opportunities for different stakeholders,
create awareness and create an umbrella structure to oversee innovation ecosystem of the
country.
One of the major initiatives taken in first year of establishment is Atal Tinkering Labs (ATL) -
Creating problem solving mindset across schools in India.
With a vision to ‘Cultivate one Million children in India as Neoteric Innovators’, Atal Innovation
Mission is establishing Atal Tinkering Laboratories (ATLs) in schools across India. The objective
of this scheme is to foster curiosity, creativity and imagination in young minds; and inculcate
skills such as design mindset, computational thinking, adaptive learning, physical computing etc.
ATL is a workspace where young minds can give shape to their ideas through hands on do-it-
yourself mode; and learn innovation skills. Young children will get a chance to work with tools
and equipment to understand the concepts of STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering and
Math). ATL would contain educational and learning ‘do it yourself’ kits and equipment on –
science, electronics, robotics, open source microcontroller boards, sensors and 3D printers and
computers. Other desirable facilities include meeting rooms and video conferencing facility.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 20


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

1.3 AIM- CollabCAD Synergy


Atal Innovation Mission, NITI Aayog and National Informatics Centre (NIC), Meity jointly
launched CollabCAD, a collaborative network enabled and desktop software system, providing a
total engineering solution from 3D product design and 2D drafting. Latest version of CollabCAD
desktop software and e-CollabCAD web application portal was provided under Atal Tinkering
Labs (ATL) - ‘Tinker from Home’ campaign for students of 5000 plus schools across the country
on ATL Community Day. CollabCAD was launched ‘virtually’ during COVID-19 lockdown period.
The aim is to provide an indigenous digital platform to students of Atal Tinkering Labs (ATLs)
across the country to create and modify 3D designs. CollabCAD (https://collabcad.gov.in), a ‘Make
In India’ CAD software would enable students to create 3D design data on their desktop and share
it to the e-CollabCAD web viewer application for data storage and visualization on NIC Cloud.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 21


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 2. About CollabCAD

2.1 Introduction
CollabCAD is a 3D CAD Software system for collaborative design & development of Industrial
Designs. It is developed on the Linux platform and is available for Windows (7,8,10) and Linux
(Red Hat, Ubuntu and CentOS). CollabCAD is developed using open source software tools such as
Java/Java 3D, Open Cascade geometry kernel and supports open standards of data exchange such
as XML, STEP, IGES, and VRML to ensure interoperability.
CollabCAD facilitates the conventional CAD/CAM capabilities like design, drafting, surface and
solid modeling, feature based modeling, data exchange, scripting etc. Surface models can be
reverse engineered from point cloud digitized data, obtained from raw/scanned data. CollabCAD
also provides reflection line analysis for visual inspection using Zebra Stripes mapping. The
Zebra stripes mapping is a surface evaluation method for checking surface continuity.
CollabCAD also offers other niche features like Bar Code to link the designs to non-CAD utilities
like MRP, Meshing, Creation and linking of databases etc. CollabCAD also provides database
connectivity and a component library framework. It enables the user to create or use a
component library.
Besides the conventional CAD/CAM features, it also provides a collaborative framework for
CAD/CAM professionals to work across a network and concurrently access the same design for
viewing and modification.

2.2 Modeling Philosophy of CollabCAD


CollabCAD is a 3D CAD Software developed based on free and open source solutions & libraries
for the collaborative design & development of industrial designs. It is developed by the Computer
Aided Design (CAD) Group of National Informatics Centre (NIC), Ministry of Communications and
Information Technology, New Delhi, the IT support professionals from India.
CollabCAD can run on Windows and Linux platforms. It is available in two modes.
• CollabCAD Standalone to work on standalone systems
• CollabCAD Client Server mode for collaborative designing and multiple sharing.
CollabCAD has various modules
• Design & Drafting
• Surface Modeling
• Solid Modeling
• Collaborative Design
• Database Link
• Data Exchange

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 22


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Customization
• Visualization

CollabCAD is based on the "Open Cascade" geometry kernel, which is a 3D kernel. This means, a
point in Open Cascade is a 3D point and so are all the other entities like lines, arcs etc. Therefore,
the basic modeling philosophy followed in CollabCAD is 3D unlike in other solutions where the
start is 2D and then it gets into 3D mode. In view of the above, in CollabCAD one always has the
3D workspace and starts with 3D workspace. In CollabCAD workspace always refers to 3D space.
Work view is a display of any of the 3D spaces such as front, back, top, bottom, right, left,
isometric or any of the user defined views. The name of the work view would be displayed in
black colour in the control panel of CollabCAD.

Workspace is a right-handed orthogonal (composed of right angles) reference space in which


user defines entities. It is essentially a local coordinate system for defining entities with the origin
always at (0.0,0.0,0.0). The abbreviations XT, YT, and ZT are used respectively for the X, Y, and Z
transform coordinate axes of the workspace. The name of the current workspace would be
displayed in red colour in the control panel of CollabCAD.

Work Plane: For each workspace there is a work plane. For a given workspace, the work plane is
parallel to the XT-YT plane of the workspace and at a depth along the ZT axis of the workspace.
The depth of the work plane is 0.0 at the time of definition. Whenever user changes the current
depth, he specifies a new work plane long the ZT-axis of the current workspace. The ZT
coordinate of the current work plane can be read from the control panel of CollabCAD.

When CollabCAD is invoked as Standalone or Client-Server Mode it will prompt the user to
choose the units (in mm or inch), drafting standard (ANSI or IS) and enter part name. On
completion, CollabCAD graphics screen will appear which consists of menu bars, toolbars, status
bar and tool palette for creating the part or model. CollabCAD uses direct three-dimensional
modeling, first the user creates profile (sketch in other software). The profile can be of basic
entities like points, lines, arcs and curves then go for creating the solid using slab, revolution of
solid, sweep solid, loft solid etc.

2.2.1 Modeling technique of CollabCAD compared with other CAD software


2.2.1.1 CollabCAD
• While creating a new part, by default the graphics window will be set to front work view and
front workspace where user can start creating the part or model. The user has the option of
changing the workspace and work view.
• If needed user can create additional workspace by various options available in the
workspace creation menu and set it.
• Once the profile (2D or 3D curve) is created in the current workspace the user can create
solid model out of it.
• CollabCAD allows multiple profiles in a single workspace.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 23


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

2.2.1.2 Other CAD Software


• While creating a new part, the user will be in part design mode, there is no work view, user
chooses a work plane to create sketch in 2D sketcher mode
• User exits the sketch mode to part mode to get 3D.
• Only one sketch allowed per feature for a sketch plane.
User has the option of grid enable and disable option for fine creation of profile. The user has the
option of snap /moving the objects/creating the objects on to grid points.

2.3 Stand-Alone and Client-Server


2.3.1 Stand-Alone
If user starts CollabCAD Stand Alone, then CollabCAD application window will appear. The user
is prompted to select a "New" part or "Open" an existing one. No user validation will take place
in this case.

Figure 2-1: Main window of CollabCAD

2.3.2 Client-Server
When user starts the CollabCAD client, it prompts for login. Only valid users can login to
CollabCAD server. CollabCAD has its own user
authentication system. It does not depend upon the OS for
user authentication. Initially when CollabCAD is installed,
the user list is empty. So, one must create this user list for
the CollabCAD server authentication. First time this can
be achieved by starting CollabCAD client and login with
the same name as the login id of the person who has
started the CollabCAD server without any password. Now
this person is the super user and he should add the list of
users to the authentication system using Admin button
from the menu bar. If one does not add users after
starting the CollabCAD client first time, then next time Figure 2-2: Login to CollabCAD Server

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 24


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

onwards others cannot login, only the person whoever had started CollabCAD client first time,
can login and of course he can add, modify or delete users at any time.
Windows: Use Windows user login id with no password.
Linux: Use Linux user login id with no password.

2.4 System Requirements


CollabCAD can be run either in Client-Server mode or Stand-Alone mode. CollabCAD runs on
Windows 7/10, and Linux (RHEL, CentOS, Ubuntu) platforms. The CollabCAD Server requires
JRE 1.2 (or better). The CollabCAD Client application requires JRE 1.3 and Java 3D. These are
packaged into the installation bundle for the platform. Java 3D recommends a graphics
accelerator on the system. MySQL/PostgreSQL for database is optional.
System Requirements
• 2 GB RAM
• 2 GB of Free disk space
• Virtual memory of 800 MB - 1 GB
• OpenGL supported Hardware Accelerated Graphics Adapter with 64MB or more VRAM
Download CollabCAD for the system from CollabCAD website (https://collabcad.gov.in/).
CollabCAD runs on Windows (7/8/10) and Linux platforms. Please follow the installation
instructions according to the platform.

2.5 Installation
2.5.1 Installing CollabCAD on Windows
User must have at least 800 MB of free disk space in the C:\TEMP directory. The installation will
not proceed if this is not available.
The installation would require around 235 MB for "CollabCAD"
To install CollabCAD Server and Application/Client
• Double click the CollabCAD.zip file (To extract the downloaded zip file, any zip extractor can
be used).
• Extract the files in some directory (say C:\temp\disk1).
• Double click on setup.exe from the extracted files (In NT/2000 user should be the
administrator or should have the administrative privilege to install this). (say
c:\temp\disk1\setup.exe)
• Follow the installer instructions. The Installation wizard will guide user through the setup
process. User may refer CollabCAD website for detailed step by step installation.

2.5.2 Installing CollabCAD on Linux


2.5.2.1 tgz format

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 25


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

User must have at least 400 MB free disk space on the /tmp file system to install CollabCAD. The
file size of collabcad_linux.tgz will be around 1.7 GB and the installation would require around 5
GB. After downloading the file, type the following command
tar -xvzf collabcad.tgz
This will install CollabCAD on the system by creating the directory called ‘collabcad’

2.5.2.2 rpm format


User must have at least 400 MB free disk space on the /tmp file system in order to install
CollabCAD. The file size of collabcad_VERISON_NUMBER.rpm will be around 1.7GB and the
installation would require around 5 GB. After downloading the file, type the following command
rpm -ivh collabcad_VERISON_NUMBER.rpm
This will install CollabCAD on the system by creating the directory called ‘collabcad’

2.5.3 Configure
CollabCAD supports Java localization and internationalization. By default all texts are displayed
in ENGLISH language, if user like to change the language then modify "ccadcli.LOCALE"
variable in "collabcad_client.properties" file located in
"CollaCAD_installed_directory/config" directory. Languages supported are English,
French, German, Italian, Norwegian and Spanish.

2.6 Getting Started with CollabCAD


CollabCAD runs on Windows and Linux platforms. Please consult the specific sections on how to
run the CollabCAD server and CollabCAD Client on a platform. CollabCAD can be executed in
Client-Server mode or Stand-Alone mode.

2.6.1 Running CollabCAD on Windows


2.6.1.1 Starting CollabCAD in Client-Server mode
• First start the CollabCAD application server. To do this, go to the start button on the task bar
and follow the given path
Start ---> Programs ---> CollabCAD --> Start CollabCAD Server

• This will start the CollabCAD application server in a DOS window. Make sure users see
'CollabCAD Application Server Ready' in this window, before launching the CollabCAD
Application/Client.
• To stop the CollabCAD application server, go to the start button on the task bar and follow
the given path
Start ---> Programs ---> CollabCAD --> Stop CollabCAD Server

This will stop the CollabCAD application server.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 26


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

NOTE: -The above-mentioned path to start or stop the CollabCAD application server will start or
stop the server on the following default argument values:
RMI_Port=1099, DB_host=localhost, DB_port=3333
Please note that improper CollabCAD Server shutdown or stopping the CollabCAD Application
Server by Ctrl-C or directly closing the Dos Window may not start the CollabCAD server next
time. This is because of the ".lock" file present in the \parts directory. This is present as a
safeguard against multiple servers starting from the same location. This file is to be removed
manually.
• After starting the CollabCAD Server, start the CollabCAD Application/Client. To start this,
follow the path
Start ---> Programs ---> CollabCAD --> CollabCAD Client

Once the application comes up, it will prompt for login to CollabCAD server.

NOTE: - Starting the CollabCAD Application/Client by the above-mentioned path will start the
application/client by the default CollabCAD Server hostname and port number (i.e. localhost and
1099 respectively).

If the CollabCAD Server hostname or port number or both values are other than default ones,
user can start the CollabCAD Application/Client on the specific hostname or port number or both
by editing collabcadclient.bat which will be in the directory where CollabCAD is installed.

2.6.1.2 Starting CollabCAD in Stand Alone mode


Start the CollabCAD Application in Stand-Alone Mode. To start this, follow the path

Start ---> Programs ---> CollabCAD --> CollabCAD Stand-Alone

2.6.2 Running CollabCAD on Linux


The procedure to start CollabCAD in Client-Server mode or in Stand-Alone mode using a single
script file is as follows

2.6.2.1 Starting CollabCAD in Standalone mode


Open a terminal. Change the directory to where CollabCAD is installed. Run the script
"collabcad" as follows:

./collabcad [complete_part_file_path]

2.6.2.2 Starting CollabCAD in Client-Server mode


• First Start the CollabCAD application server. For this, follow the following steps
First start the CollabCAD application server. For this, open a terminal. Change the directory to
where CollabCAD is installed. Run the script "collabcad" as follows:
Usage: ./collabcad [-options] [args...]

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 27


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

where options include


No options will start the CollabCAD application client and opens the part in stand-alone mode.
[--/-] listen starts the CollabCAD Application Server
[--/-] stop stops the CollabCAD Application Server
[--/-] help prints this help message
example: ./collabcad –listen
This will start the CollabCAD application server. Make sure user sees 'CollabCAD Application
Server Ready' on this console, before launching the CollabCAD Application/Client.
NOTE: - The above script collabcad will start the CollabCAD application server on the
following default argument values: -

RMI_Port=1099, DB_host=localhost, DB_port=3333

If user wishes to start or stop the CollabCAD Application server on the argument values other
than default ones do the following: -
Change the directory to where CollabCAD is installed.
Run the script "collabcad" as follows: -

./collabcad [[--/-][listen/stop]] [RMI_port] [DB_host] [DB_port]

If the port is already in use please use some other port (e.g. "./collabcad -listen -p
1112") or contact the system administrator for using some other port.
To access CollabCAD application server from remote client systems, follow the below given steps:
-
Add the IP Address and HostName of the Server in the hosts file (/etc/hosts) of Server system
as a root user and restart the network service.
• Start the CollabCAD Application/Client. To start this,
Open a new terminal for client side, run the script "collabcad" (make sure that to change to
CollabCAD directory)

./collabcad -cl or ./collabcad –cl

Once the Application comes up, it will prompt for Login to CollabCAD server.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 28


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 3. CollabCAD Workspaces and Views

3.1 Introduction
A workspace is a right-handed orthogonal reference space in which the entities can be defined.
For each new workspace, user assigns 'View Name'. The user can define any number of
workspaces per part.

3.2 Workspace
3.2.1 Define Workspace
With this option, user can define a new workspace. For each new Workspace, user assigns 'View
Name'. User can define any number of workspaces per part. This menu provides the following
different methods for creating a workspace.

3.2.1.1 Three Points


With this choice, user can define a workspace by choosing three points. The points can be
selected either by screen position or by key-in. For key-in, by pressing the right mouse button, a
dialog box will be displayed in which user can enter X, Y and Z co-ordinates of the required point.
The XT, YT plane of the workspace is parallel to the plane passing through the three points. First
point defines the tail of the xt-axis and second point defines the head. The yt-axis is perpendicular
to the xt-axis and in the direction to third point. User will respond to the following prompts:
• Specify point for negative end of x axis
• Specify point for positive end of x axis
• Specify point for positive direction of y axis
• Specify the Origin point.

3.2.1.2 Two Lines


To define a Workspace, user selects two lines or surface/solid edges and the origin point. The
XT, YT plane of the workspace is parallel to the plane passing through the two lines or edges. The
first line or edge selected by the user defines the X axis of the workspace. The head or positive
direction of the axis is determined by which end of the line or edge the user will select. A vector
is traced from the projection of the chosen end point of the second line to the end point of the
first line. This vector defines the positive direction of the Y axis. The origin for the workspace will
be at the origin point given by the user. The system internally verifies the lines or edges and will
not allow the selection of parallel edges or lines. User responds to the following prompts:
• Select line at one end for positive X direction
• Select line at one end for positive Y direction
• Specify the Origin point.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 29


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

3.2.1.3 Along Line, Point


With this choice, user can define a workspace with a point and line where the XT, YT plane of the
workspace is parallel to a plane passing through the line and point. The xt-axis is parallel to the
line and the positive end of the yt-axis is in the direction of the point. The positive end of the xt-
axis is in the direction of the line where user selects it. The user responds to the following
prompts:
• Select a line at one end for positive x-axis
• Specify point for positive direction of y axis
• Specify the Origin point.

3.2.1.4 Normal to Line, Point


With this choice, user can define a workspace with a point and line where the YT, ZT plane of the
workspace is parallel to a plane passing through the line and point. The +zt-axis is parallel to the
line the user select. Indicate the line near one of its end points, as the end point chosen
determines the positive direction of the zt-axis. The user responds to the following prompts:
• Select a line at one end for positive z axis
• Specify point for positive direction of y axis
• Specify the Origin point.

3.2.1.5 Normal to Curve


With a single click, a workspace will be created normal to a curve. Default axes will be defined
for this workspace and end point of the curve which is nearer to the clicked point will be defined
as workspace origin point. Curve normal and tangent at the clicked point are considered for
defining the default axes of the workspace. The name of workspace will be "entity
name_+nml+integer no". (e.g. lin1_nml1, arc2_nml2, bsc3_nml3 etc.). The user responds to the
following prompt:
• Specify Curve

3.2.1.6 On Planar face


With a single click, a surface plane or solid face can be created as workspace with default axes
and origin point. The name of workspace will be "entity name_+pln+integer no" (e.g. box1_pln1,
slb2_pln2 etc.). The existing work plane will be replaced by this workspace and name of
workspace will be displayed in red colour at the message panel (just below the view name). If
the created workspace is normal to the view plane, then the cursor changes to move cursor. The
user responds to the following prompt:
• Select Surface or Solid plane

3.2.1.7 Parallel to Plane


With this choice, user can define a workspace whose XT, YT plane is parallel to a selected surface
plane or solid face. The +ZT axis is normal to the surface plane or solid face the user select. User

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 30


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

selects a line or surface/solid edge near one of its end points for defining the XT-axis. The end
point chosen determines the positive direction of the XT-axis. The system internally verifies the
normal of the plane/face and lines/edges and will not allow the selection if the both are parallel.
The user responds to the following prompts:
• Select Surface or Solid plane
• Select a line at one end for positive X direction
• Specify the Origin point.

3.2.1.8 Parallel to Planar Entity


With this choice, user can define a workspace based on the orientation of the selected planar
entity. The user can select the following entity types for this method:
• Arc
• Ellipse
• Parabola
• Hyperbola

3.2.1.9 Dynamic View


With this choice, user can define a new workspace from the existing dynamic view. It may be
noted that, when dynamics is applied to all the views, the entities would be in a disoriented state
in the newly created view also. The original position can be restored by pressing the F11 key or
using the Restore option in the View menu. This issue would not arise when the dynamics is
limited to the current view alone.

3.2.1.10 Rotate
With this choice, user can define a new workspace by selecting an existing workspace and
rotating it about a line or axis. The user responds to the following prompts:
• Select workspace
• Rotation about
• Rotation angle

3.2.1.11 New Origin


With this choice, user can define a new workspace by selecting an existing workspace and
changing its origin.

3.2.2 Change Workspace


With this user can decouple the work plane and view plane. User can change the work plane by
selecting any one of the workspaces listed in the combo box. The selected work plane will be
displayed in red colour at the message panel (just below the view name). If the selected work
plane is normal to the view plane, then message ' This function is invalid as the View plane is
perpendicular to Work plane' will be displayed.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 31


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

3.2.3 Change Work view


With this user can decouple the work plane and view plane. User can change the view plane by
selecting any one of the workspaces listed in the combo box. If the selected view plane is normal
to the work plane, then message ' This function is invalid as the View plane is perpendicular to
Work plane' will be displayed.

3.2.4 Align View/Work planes - (F5)


With this user can couple the work plane and view plane.

3.3 Views
The options in this menu refer to the view management of the opened part. Working plane is
always the same as view. This means, as the view changes, working plane also gets changed to
the same as the view. The names of currently active views (Front, Front-Top, or Multiple) are
displayed in the status bar.

3.3.1 Front
The "Front" menu item changes the view of part to Front View. Front view is the default view of
a newly opened part. Working plane is X-Y plane in Front View.

3.3.2 Right
The "Right" menu item changes the view of part to Right View. The working plane of the part is
also changed to Right Working plane, i.e., Y-Z plane.

3.3.3 Top
The "Top" menu item changes the view of part to Top View. The working plane of the part is also
changed to Top Working plane, i.e., Z-X plane.

3.3.4 Isometric
The "Isometric" menu item changes the view of part in Iso View. The working plane of the part
is also changed to Iso Working plane, i.e., a plane that makes equal angles with X, Y, and Z axis.

3.3.5 Single View


The "Single View" menu item provides flexibility to the user to display the view of his/her choice.
This option is more useful for displaying the 'workspaces' created by the user. The combo box
lists all the standard views as well as the workspaces.

3.3.6 Multiple Views


3.3.6.1 Two Horizontal

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 32


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

This option displays the Front and Top views horizontally (above and below respectively).
However, the user can specifically activate a particular view in this Display mode by selecting the
view listed in the combo box.

3.3.6.2 Two Vertical


This option displays the Front and Right views vertically (left and right respectively). However,
the user can specifically activate a particular view in this Display mode by selecting the view
listed in the combo box.

3.3.6.3 Four views


The "Four views" menu item displays the part in all the four views namely Front, Right, Iso and
Top. Front view is displayed in top-left corner then Right, Iso and Top Views are displayed in
clockwise direction. The user can specifically activate a particular view in Four Views Display
mode by selecting the views/workspaces listed in the combo box.

3.3.6.4 Six views


The "Six Views" menu item displays the part in all the six views namely Top, Left, Front, Right,
Bottom and Iso. User needs not specifically activate a particular view in Six Views Display mode.
Mouse click is automatically identified in respective views. Working planes are the same as
respective views in different views.

3.3.7 Section View


This option is used to get a section view or the internal construction of a solid entity in part
design and component(s) in assembly design, when cut with a planar surface or a line entity.
Hatch pattern will be displayed on the solid/component(s) intersecting portion of an object and
boundary, background/ hidden edges for view of the solid are displayed using curves. There is
an option to display sectional cut curves alone i.e. excluding the background curves, using a check
box 'Generate Back Edges'.

3.3.7.1 In Part Design:


When this menu is selected the user will be prompted to select the solid to section with the
message "Specify Solid to section". On selection of a solid the user will be asked to select the plane
or line for sectioning with the prompt "Specify Plane or Line". After the selection of Plane or Line,
click to indicate the viewing direction.

3.3.7.2 In Assembly Design:


When this menu is selected the user will be prompted to select the component(s) to section with
the message "Select Component(s) and press Enter". On selection of component(s) the user will
be prompted to select the start point and end point for defining the section line with the prompt
"Specify start point for sectioning" and "Specify end point for sectioning" respectively. After this
user specifies view direction "Click to specify view direction" .

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 33


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

After this, a dialog window will appear in both part and


assembly design using which user can enter the hatch
pattern and other hatch parameters and the choice to
display background edges or not. On successful completion
of the operation, a hatch is displayed, and section lining
entity is created on the face of intersection between
Solid/Component(s) and the Plane/Line. It displays two
views (split) to the user.
• Current View of sectioning
• Section View workspace with section lining (hatch)
In Part design, section plane workspace name is given as Figure 3-1: Parameters of Section View

system name of solid model suffixed with '_secXXX' where


XXX is the number of section view associated with the solid
model.
While in Assembly design, section plane workspace name
is given as 'comp_secXXX' where XXX is the number of
section view associated with the assembly.
The section curves and background curves are added to a
group entity in assembly design.
Figure 3-2: Section View of a Solid Model

3.4 3D Canvas Features


3.4.1 Zoom
This menu provides a set of options to operate on the
displayed views.

3.4.1.1 Auto Fit


This option scales the view such that all the entities fits Figure 3-3: Section View with background
within the view. curves

3.4.1.2 Region
This option zooms the selected region so that it fits within the view.

3.4.1.3 Half Scale


This option scales the view by half.

3.4.1.4 Double Scale


This option scales the view by two-fold.

3.4.1.5 Ratio
This option scales the view by the given ratio.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 34


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

3.4.1.6 Last Scale


This option reverts the view to the previous scale.

3.4.1.7 Base Scale


This option scales the view to the Base Scale (the scale when the part was opened).

3.4.2 Pan
3.4.2.1 Screen Position
This option pans the view between the selected points.

3.4.2.2 Delta
This option pans the view along the given distance.

3.4.3 Dynamics - (F9)


This option allows toggling between the dynamics and non-dynamics mode. During dynamics
mode the geometry can be rotated, translated, and zoomed by dragging the mouse. To rotate,
drag the mouse keeping left mouse button pressed. For translating, drag the mouse keeping right
mouse button pressed. And for zooming, drag the mouse keeping both mouse buttons pressed.
During dynamics mouse clicks won't be active for other operations.
Dynamic rotations would take place about the point at the physical center of the canvas when
dynamics is invoked. Rotations (about local X, Y and Z axes) can also be specified precisely, using
the sliders that would appear at the top-right corner of the canvas when this option is invoked.
Dynamic rotation, translation and zoom can be also performed through the above mouse
operations by keeping the Ctrl key pressed. Releasing the key and the mouse would disable the
Dynamics mode.

3.4.4 Restore - (F11)


This option brings back the view to the orientation prior to dynamics.

3.4.5 Active Stereo 3D - (F12)


This option toggles the Active Stereo 3D View in the present Canvas. Dynamics also would be
simultaneously enabled/disabled. The hardware should support Stereo View to enable this
feature.

3.4.6 Shading - (S)


With this option, a shaded view of the selected entities can be obtained. When the option is
invoked, the user would be prompted to select entities to be shaded. On selecting the desired
entities and pressing Enter, the entities would be Shaded. Only solids and surfaces can be shaded.
Entities created during shaded display won't be readily visible. Using this option, the user can
choose how the shaded display should be rendered during shading. The available options are:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 35


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

3.4.6.1 Facets:
In this mode, only the facets are rendered during shading.

3.4.6.2 Facets & Edges:


In this mode, both the facets and the edges are rendered during shading

3.4.6.3 Wire Mesh:


In this mode, the edges of the facets are rendered during shading.

3.4.6.4 Hidden Line Removal:


In this mode, the Hidden Line Removed view would be rendered during shading.

3.4.6.5 HLR with Back Edges:


In this mode, the Hidden Line Removed view would be rendered during shading along with
Hidden Edges in dotted lines.

3.4.6.6 Zebra Mapping:


Zebra stripes mapping for reflection analysis is a surface evaluation method for checking surface
continuity. A reflection-mapped image of a surface with black and white stripes reflecting on it
will show the smallest deviations on a surface or a set of surfaces. This method is derived from
car prototyping wherein surface quality is inspected by checking the quality of reflections of a
neon-light ceiling on the car surface. Basically, it is diagnostic shading for surface quality
evaluation.

3.4.7 Refresh - (R)


This option removes the shaded view and brings
back the normal display. Entities created during
shaded display would be visible only on
refreshing the view.
Local Coordinate System
3.4.8 Coordinates
3.4.8.1 Local Coordinate System
It is an auxiliary user defined coordinate system
so that user can define a cartesian coordinate
system whose XY plane is coincident with the
Global Coordinate System
desired plane of construction.
Figure 3-4: Local and Global Coordinate Systems
3.4.8.2 Global Coordinate System
The global coordinate system is defined as the reference space of the model to which all the
model geometrical data is stored. It is a cartesian system which forms the default coordinate

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 36


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

system. The X-axis will point right along the section horizontal, while the Y-axis will point up
along the section vertical. The Z-axis is created using the right-hand rule.

3.4.9 Change Depth - (D)


Use this menu item to change the depth of the working plane, i.e., Z value of the transformed
coordinates (ZT). The current ZT value is displayed in the status bar (by default it is 0.0). On
clicking this menu, a dialogue box will appear with the following fields.

3.4.9.1 View
Select the View where depth is to be applied.

3.4.9.2 Input
Select the mode of input of depth value.
• Absolute Value: User shall enter the Absolute value of Depth
• Relative Value: User shall enter the Relative value of Depth
• Select Point: User shall Select a Point at the desired Depth

3.4.9.3 Depth
Enter the Depth Value (for Absolute and Relative Inputs).

3.4.10 Layer
3.4.10.1 Create Layer
Using this option, the user can create a new layer. On invoking this menu, a dialogue box would
appear through which the user can enter the name of the new layer.

3.4.10.2 Change Layer


Using this option, the user can change the currently working layer. On invoking this menu, a
dialogue box would appear from which the user can select the new layer.

3.4.10.3 Add to Layer


Using this option, the user can add a set of entities to a selected layer. On invoking this option,
the user would be prompted to select the entities whose layer needs to be modified. On selecting
the entities and pressing Enter, a dialogue box would appear from which the user can select the
name of the layer into which the selected entities should be added.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 37


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 4. Geometry Work Bench - Basic Entities

4.1 Introduction
The system supports a variety of basic geometric entities like Point, Line, Arc, Rectangle and
Polyline. Easy-to-use interfaces are provided for creation of each of these entities. The following
basic entities are currently supported in system.

• Point
• Line
• Arc
• Rectangle
• Polygon
• Profile
• Sketch

4.2 Point
Point entity can be created in following different methods.

4.2.1 Screen Position/Tool bar


When point creation is invoked from the Screen Position or Tool Bar, the system prompts with a
message "Specify Point position". User can click anywhere in the drawing area and a point will
be created and displayed there.

4.2.2 Enter coordinates


A dialog box will be displayed in which the user can enter the X, Y and Z co-ordinates of the
required point. When the OK button is pressed, the point will be created, and dialog box is
displayed again for creation of a new point. Click the Cancel button to close the point creation.

4.2.3 Mid-Point
This menu allows creation of a new Point at the mid-point of two-point positions specified on the
canvas. On invocation, the user would be prompted to specify the first and the second point
positions. The new Point would be created at the mid-point of the two specified point positions.

4.2.4 Normal on a curve


With this choice, user can create a new point by projecting a point normally on to a curve. The
system prompts the following messages for the user.
Specify Point - Use the mouse to specify a point.
Specify a curve- Select a curve on to which the new point is created.
Error messages:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 38


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• If a point is not selected, the system displays an error message:


Entity not supported, select a point
• If the entity selected is not a curve, the system displays an error message:
Entity not supported, select a curve
• If the projected point is not created, the system displays an error message box:
Algorithm failure
Projected point not found.

4.2.5 Normal on a surface


With this choice, user can create a new point by projecting a point normally (orthogonal) on to a
surface/face of a solid. The system prompts the following messages for the user.
Specify Point - Use the mouse to specify a point or pick an existing point/vertex (implicit mode).
Specify a Surface or Solid face - Select a surface or a face of solid entity on to which the new point
is to be created.

Error messages:

If the projected point is not created, the system displays an error message box:
Remote Exception
Projection of point failed

4.2.6 Intersect
With this choice, user can create a point by intersecting two curves. The system prompts the
following messages for the user.
Specify First curve - Use the mouse to select an existing curve.
Specify Second curve - Select a second existing curve.
The system displays in the message panel, the number of intersections found.

Error messages:

• If point is not created by intersection, the system displays an error message:


No intersections found.
• If the entity selected is not a curve, the system displays an error message:
Entity not supported, select again

4.2.7 Center of Curve


Option generates a point on the center of the selected curve. Basic Curves include circle, ellipse,
parabola and hyperbola.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 39


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

4.2.8 Polar
With this choice, user can create a new point by specifying the Polar co-ordinates with respect to
a given point.
The system prompts the following messages for the user.
Specify Base Point - Use the mouse to select an existing point.
A Dialog box is displayed - The user can enter the Distance and Angle of the required point with
respect to the clicked point and local X axis respectively. When OK is clicked, the point is created.

4.2.9 Incremental
With this choice, user can create a new point by specifying an increment with respect to a given
point in the local XYZ axis.
The system prompts the following messages for the user.
Specify Base Point - Use the mouse to select an existing point.
A Dialog box is displayed - The user can enter the increment of the required point with respect
to the clicked point in the local XYZ axis. When OK is clicked, the point is created.

4.2.10 On Curve
With this choice, user can create number of point(s) on any curve. The system prompts a dialog
box for entering Number of points/Distance/Both. As per the choice, points are created on the
curve.
Number of points: In this case, points are distributed uniformly (all the points will be equally
distant).
Distance: In this case, the total length of the curve is divided by the length given by the user and
the result would be the no. of points to be drawn on the curve. If the given distance is greater
than the length of the curve, only the 'start point' is displayed.
Both: In this case, both distance and no. of points are considered for the creation of points on the
curve. Whenever calculated length (Distance * No of Points) exceeds the total length of the curve,
it prompts an error message "Points can't be created". Otherwise, it displays the given no. of
points on the curve at a given distance.

4.3 Line
Lines can be created by the following different methods

4.3.1 Screen Position


In this method, the user will be prompted to "Specify the start point of the Line". The user may
click anywhere in the drawing area and that point will be taken as the start point of the Line. A
temporary Point Marker will be created at that point and the user will be prompted to "Specify
the end point of the Line (OR Press 'P' to input Polar Co-ordinates; 'T' to input Delta values)". At

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 40


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

this stage, the user can see the 'Length' and 'Theeta' made by the mouse moved point in the Local
view in the right corner of Message Panel. The Line creation is a continuous operation and the
end point of the previous line is taken as the start point of the next segment. This process
continues until ENTER, ESC key is pressed, or Mouse is Double clicked (two clicks in quick
succession made at the same point) If the user presses 'P' or 'T' a separate Input box with current
values will appear to take the data in each case. After pressing OK, a Line will be created with the
given parameters. Or, If the user chooses to click in the drawing area he can do so. Once the end
point is clicked, a line will be created connecting the start and the end point and displayed. The
Point marker created at the start point also will be erased. This method can also be invoked from
the Tool Bar.

4.3.2 End Co-ordinates - (L)


When this option is invoked, a dialog box will appear in the screen and the user can create lines
by entering the end-point co-ordinates of the line and pressing the OK button. Click the Cancel
button to terminate line creation operation.

4.3.3 Parallel to Orthogonal Axes (Local Coordinate System)


Using this option, the user can create lines parallel to local X- axis, Y-axis in interactive mode. To
create a line Normal to the view plane, the user presses "N".
On invoking this option, the user is prompted to specify start point of the Line.
Then, the user is prompted to specify the end point of the Line. At this stage, the user can see the
'Length' of the line at the bottom right corner of Message Panel. The user can press "T" to input
length of the Line or "C" to draw a complete line passing through the start point.

4.3.4 Perpendicular to Curve from a Point


Using this option, the user can create a line perpendicular to curve in an interactive mode. On
invoking this option, the user is prompted to specify start point of the Line.
Then, the user is prompted to specify the curve to which the line will be perpendicular.
At this stage, the user can see all possible options of perpendicular points on curve, indicated by
point markers. On moving the mouse close to any of the solutions, the desired option can be
chosen. 'Length' of the line at the bottom right corner of Message Panel will be displayed during
the mouse move. The user can press "T" to input length of the Line before entering the end point.
A negative value of length will create a line in opposite direction.

Error Message:

• Point on curve: - The clicked point for start of line lies on the curve

4.3.5 Parallel to a line


The user is first prompted to specify Line. The user is then prompted to click a point to specify
the distance between the parallel lines. At this stage, the user can see the 'Length' made by the
mouse moved point in the right corner of Message Panel. The user can press "T" to specify the

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 41


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

distance of the Line through the keyboard input. Option generates a line parallel to the selected
line.
(If clicked Point is between the end Points of Line - length of Line equals the selected line if
clicked Point is not between the end Points of Line - Line is extended till the clicked Point.)

Error Messages: -

• Point on a line: - The clicked point lies on the line

4.3.6 Through point & Oblique to line


The user is first prompted to specify the point through which the required line passes. The user
is then prompted to click on the line Oblique to the required line. A dialog box will appear on the
screen and the user can enter the angle made by the required line with the given line. At this
stage, the user can see the 'Length' made by the mouse moved point in the right corner of
Message Panel. The user can press "T" to specify the Length of the Line through the keyboard
input.
"C" for a complete line starting from clicked point to the Line. Option generates a line oblique to
the selected line and passing through the specified point.

Error Messages: -

• Point on a line: - The clicked point lies on the line.


• Line not in plane: - The line and arc are not in same plane.
• Tangent not found: - Tangency is not found with the line.
• No solution: - There exists no solution with the given inputs.

4.3.7 Tangent to Arc & Perpendicular to Line


The user is first prompted to specify the Perpendicular line to the required line. The user is then
prompted to click on Tangent arc to the required line. Then, the user is prompted to click the end
point of the Line. At this stage, the user can see the 'Length' made by the mouse moved point in
the right corner of Message Panel. The user can press "T" to specify the Length of the Line through
the keyboard input. "C" for a complete line starting from tangent point on arc to the Line. Option
generates a line perpendicular to the selected line and tangential to the selected arc. The position
of the line created is based on where the user clicks Tangent arc.

Error Messages: -

• Point on a line: - The clicked point lies on the line.


• Line not in plane: - The line and arc are not in a plane.
• Tangent not found: - Tangency not found with the arc.
• No solution: - There exists no solution with the given inputs.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 42


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

4.3.8 Tangent to Arc & Parallel to Line


The user is first prompted to specify the Parallel line to the required line. The user is then
prompted to click on the Tangent arc to the required line. Then, the user is prompted to click the
end point of the Line. At this stage, the user can see the 'Length' made by the mouse moved point
in the right corner of Message Panel. The user can press "T" to specify the Length of the Line
through the keyboard input.
Option generates a line parallel to the selected line and tangential to the selected arc. The position
of the line created is based on where the user clicks on the Tangent arc.

Error Messages: -

• Point on a line: - The clicked point lies on the line.


• Line not in plane: - The line and arc are not in same plane.
• Tangent not found: - Tangency not found with the arc.
• No solution: - There exists no solution with the given inputs.

4.3.9 Tangent to Arc & Oblique to Line


The user is first prompted to specify the line Oblique to the required line. The user is then
prompted to click on the Tangent arc to the required line. A dialog box will appear on the screen
and the user can enter the angle made by the required line with the given line. Then, the user is
prompted to click the end point of the Line. At this stage, the user can see the 'Length' made by
the mouse moved point in the right corner of Message Panel. The user can press "T" to specify
the Length of the Line through the keyboard input. "C" for a complete line starting from tangent
point on arc to the Line.
Option generates a line oblique to the selected line and tangential to the selected arc. The position
of the line created is based on where the user clicks on the tangent arc.

Error Messages: -

• Point on a line: - The clicked point lies on the line.


• Line not in plane: - The line and arc are not in same plane.
• Tangent not found: - Tangency not found with the arc.
• No solution: - There exists no solution with the given inputs.

4.3.10 Through A Point and Tangent to Arc


In this method the user will be prompted to click the point which will be the start point of the
line, once specified the user may click on the arc to which the tangent has to be drawn.

Error Messages: -

• Point not in plane: - the clicked point is not in the plane of the selected Arc.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 43


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• No Tangent found: - There exists no solution between the selected Arc & the point.
• Indicate Point outside Arc: - The clicked point lies inside the selected Arc, which is not
allowed.

4.3.11 Tangent to two Arcs


Option asks for two Arcs. Depending up on where the user clicks on the arc a line will be
generated which will be tangent to the two selected arcs

Error Messages: -

• Curves not in same plane: - The selected Arcs are not in same plane; hence no solution exists.
• No tangency found: - there exist no solution between the selected Arcs.

4.3.12 Polar
The user is first prompted to specify base point of the Polar line. Then, the user will be asked to
"Specify the end point of the line (Press 'P' to input Polar Co-ordinates)". If the user presses 'P',
an Input box will appear to take the Polar Co-ordinates. At this stage, the user can see the Polar
Co-ordinates (r, theeta) made by the mouse moved point in the Local view in the right corner of
Message Panel. After the user presses OK a Line will be formed between the base point and the
polar point formed by the given parameters. The user can also choose to click the end point in
the drawing area. Option generates a line between the base point and the polar point formed.

4.3.13 Incremental
The user is first prompted to specify base point of the Incremental line. Then, the user will be
asked to "Specify the end point of the line (Press 'T' to input Delta values dx, dy, dz)". If the user
presses 'T', an Input box will appear to take the Delta values. At this stage, the user can see the
Delta values (dx, dy, dz) made by the mouse moved point in the Local view in the right corner of
Message Panel. After the user presses OK a Line will be formed between the base point and the
Increment point formed by the given parameters. The user can also choose to click the end point
in the drawing area. Option generates a line between the base point and the polar point formed.

4.3.14 Normal to Surface


The user is first prompted to specify the Surface to which a line normal is to be drawn.
The user is then prompted to click a point on the Surface at which line normal is to be drawn. A
dialog box will appear on the screen and the user can enter the Length of the required Line. Enter
a value less than or greater than Zero. (Within specified tolerance 0.0001).Option generates a
line Normal to the selected Surface and passing through the specified point and of specified
length.

4.4 Arc
Arcs can be created by following different methods.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 44


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

4.4.1 Center & Point


This method always creates full circles in the plane where inputs are given. On selecting the
operation, the user will be prompted to "Indicate the center of the circle". Once that is indicated,
the user can specify the radius of circle either by clicking a point or by giving keyboard input by
pressing 'T'. On successful input, a full circle will be created and displayed on the drawing area.
This method can also be invoked from the Tool Bar.

4.4.2 Center & Radius - Screen Position


In this method, the user will be prompted to click center of the circle. After indicating it, the user
can specify the radius of circle either by clicking a point or by giving keyboard input by pressing
'T'. Then the user is prompted to click a point which will decide the start angle of the arc, and
then another point to decide the end angle of the arc. The user can also press 'T' to enter the
start and end angle through keyboard input. Pressing 'Enter' will create a full circle. On successful
input, an arc with given center and radius will be created in anti-clockwise direction between the
given start angle and end angle respectively.

4.4.3 Center & Radius - Key-in (A)


In this method, a dialog box will be displayed for the user to choose the plane of the circle and
enter the co-ordinates of its center and the radius. Besides it asks for the start angle and the end
angle. These are the angles at which the arc should start and end with respect to the Positive X
axis. Once all the inputs are correctly given, a circle/arc will be created and displayed in the
chosen plane.

4.4.4 Through 3 Points


In this method, the user will be prompted to input three points. On successful input, an arc will
be created connecting the three points.

4.4.5 2 Points & Radius


In this method, the user will be prompted to click 2 points which are supposed to lie on the
required arc and then, a dialog box will be displayed for the user to input the radius. On successful
input, an arc will be created passing through the two clicked points and having radius equal to
the input value given.

Error Messages: -

• Points not in a plane: - The given 2 points are not in a plane.


• Solution not found: - There exists no solution with the given inputs.

4.4.6 2 Points (Diameter)


In this method, the user will be prompted to click two points which are supposed to be the end
points of the diameter of the Arc. On successful input, an arc will be created passing through the
two clicked points and having diameter equal to the distance between the given two points.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 45


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 4-1: Different parameters for Arc creation

4.4.7 Start Point - Center – End Point/Sweep Angle


In this method, the user will be prompted to click the Start Point and then the Center. The user is
then prompted to click a point which will decide the End Angle of the arc. At this stage, he can
press "T" to give the Sweep Angle (Included Angle) through keyboard. On successful input, an
arc will be created from the Start Point to the End Point with the given Center and Radius.
Sweep Angle = End Angle - Start Angle

4.4.8 Start Point - Center - Chord Length


In this method, the user will be prompted to click the Start Point and then the Center. The user is
then prompted to click a point which will decide the Length of the chord. The Length of the Chord
is measured from the Start Point of the Arc to the Clicked Point. At this stage, user can press "T"
to give the Chord Length through keyboard. On successful input, an arc will be created from the
Start Point to the End Point with the given Chord Length.
Note: If the Chord Length given exceeds the diameter of the Arc, A semi-circle is formed.

4.4.9 Start Point – End Point - Sweep Angle/Radius


In this method, the user will be prompted to click Start and End points of the Arc. Then, a dialog
box will be displayed for the user to input either the Sweep Angle (Included Angle) or the Radius.
On successful input, an arc will be created from the Start Point to the End Point with either the
given Sweep Angle or Radius.
Sweep Angle = End Angle - Start Angle

4.4.10 Start Point – End Point - Tangent Direction


In this method, the user will be prompted to click Start and End points of the Arc. Then, the user
is prompted to click a point which will decide the direction of Tangent at Start Point. At this stage,
he can press "T" to input through keyboard the Angle of the Tangent line w.r.to Local X axis. On

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 46


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

successful input, an arc will be created from the Start Point to the End Point and Tangential to
the line between Start Point and the Clicked Point at Start Point.

4.4.11 Start Point/End Point - Radius - Start, End Angles


In this method, the user will be prompted to click a point which is supposed to be Start Point or
End Point. Then a dialog box will be displayed for the user to input the Radius, Start Angle and
End Angle. At this stage the user has to specify whether the clicked Point is Start Point or the End
Point of the arc. On successful input, an arc will be created with the given Radius, Start Angle and
End Angle.

4.4.12 Tangent - Radius (Semi-Circle)


In this method, the user will be prompted to select a Tangent Line/Arc/Circle and then to click a
point on the selected Curve where tangent Arc should be drawn. Then the user will be asked to
specify a point to give the radius of the Arc. At this stage the user can press "T" to give radius
through keyboard input. Now the user can choose between the possible solutions of semi-circles
by clicking in the respective region.
Note: This method creates a Semi-circle which is tangent to the curve at the given point.

4.4.13 Tangent - Point – Radius


In this method, the user will be prompted to select a Tangent Line/Arc/Circle and then, the user
is asked to click a point supposed to be the start point of the Arc. Then a dialog box will be
displayed for the user to input the Radius. On successful input, the user is given a choice to pick
an arc from the many possible solutions.

Error Messages: -

• Arc cannot be formed with the given parameters.

4.4.14 Center and Tangent Line


In this method, the user will be prompted to select a Tangent Line and then to click a point which
will be taken as center of the circle generated.

Error Messages: -

• Point on a line: - the clicked point lies on the line.

4.4.15 Tangent to 2 Curves and Radius


In this method, the user will be prompted to select 2 Tangent curves and then, a dialog box will
be displayed for the user to input the radius. On successful input, an arc will be created tangential
to the 2 curves and having radius equal to the input value given. The position of the arc created
is based on where the user clicks on the 2 Tangent curves.

Error Messages: -

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 47


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Lines parallel: - The 2 lines are parallel.


• Lines not in plane: - The 2 lines are not in a plane.
• No solution found: - There exists no solution with the given inputs.

4.4.16 Tangent to 3 lines


In this method, the user will be prompted to select 3 Tangent Lines and then, to click a point that
fixes the region in which the arc has to be created. On successful input, an arc will be created
tangential to the 3 lines and lying in the region of the clicked point.

Error Messages: -

• Not in plane: - The 3 lines are not in a plane.


• Tangency not found: - Tangency is not found with the lines.
• Lines are parallel: - The 3 lines are parallel.
• No solution found: - There exists no solution with the given inputs.

4.4.17 Two Tangent Lines and a Point


In this method, the user will be prompted to select a Tangent Line and then to click a point that
should lie on the required arc, then again, another Tangent Line. On successful input, an arc will
be created tangential to the 2 lines and passing through the clicked point. The position of the arc
created is based on where the user clicks on the first Tangent line.

Error Messages: -

• Not in plane: - The 2 lines are not in plane.


• Tangency not found: - Tangency is not found with the lines.

4.4.18 Tangent Line and 2 Points


In this method, the user will be prompted to select a Tangent Line and then to click 2 points which
will be considered to lie on the required arc. On successful input, an arc will be created tangential
to the line and passing through the 2 clicked points.

Error Messages: -

• Not in plane: - The line and points are not in a plane.


• Tangency not found: - Tangency not found with the line.
• Points are on line: - The points are on the same line.
• Points are too close: - The given points are too close to find a solution.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 48


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 5. 2D Profile and 2D Constraints

5.1 Introduction
A Profile/Polyline is a set of lines and arcs, connected end-to-end which will be either closed or
open. The end point of one line is the start point of the next line.

5.2 Profile Creation for Solid and Surface modeling


5.2.1 Create
In CollabCAD, Polylines are created by using mouse input only. The default creation method in
Poly line/Sketcher is for Line Creation. If Keyboard interrupt ‘A’ is pressed the creation mode
changes to Arc Creation Mode.
On invoking the operation from the Menu Bar, the user is prompted to "Select Surface/Solid
Plane or Press Enter to create profile". Here, the user has two options. First, the user can select
an existing Solid Face/Planar Surface for creation profile. The selected face/surface is then
displayed as the work view for easy creation of profiles. Second, when Enter is pressed the user
can start creating the profile in existing work view. In both cases, a Dialog box appears asking
the user if he wants to select any reference entities. If the user wants to select reference entities,
then he is prompted to select the reference entities and press enter. The user can select Lines,
Arcs and Conics. In all the cases, a grid of lines is displayed which represents the current work
plane being used for creating the profile.
If the user is in Single View mode, he can select/create the plane or press enter to start creating
the profile. The grid of lines will be displayed representing the current work plane. At this stage,
the user can also go into Multiple Views option.
In Multiple Views, the user is again asked to create/select the plane or press enter. If the user
presses enter and wishes to start creating profile in multiple views, he is asked to select the one
plane of working. Here, the grid is displayed according to the local coordinate of the selected
plane.
If the user selects the surface/face, a plane is created, and this selected/created plane is shown
on the screen in single view with the grids representing the current working plane and user can
now continue with creation of profile. The user will then be prompted to "Indicate Start Point".
The user may then click anywhere in the drawing area and that point will be taken as the start
point of the Polyline. A temporary Point Marker will be created at that point and the user will be
asked to "Indicate Next Point".

5.2.1.1 Keyboard Interrupt Keys used in Profile


Key Operation
A Tangent Arc/ Toggle Direction
C Close Polyline

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 49


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

L Parallel/Perpendicular/Tangent Line
M Reference Line (Construction Line)
N Non-Tangent Arc
P Focus Point
Q Snap Point
T Keyboard Input
U Unconstraint

5.2.1.2 Features in Line Creation mode


While in the Line Creation mode the following features are available in CollabCAD:
• Pressing Q will highlight the nearest point of the reference entities including end points of
line, center-point and end points of arc, ellipse, parabola and hyperbola, grid-points (if grid
is active). The user can click here to select the nearest point of the reference entities
implicitly.
• The currently drawn line segment will appear highlighted in yellow colour when the mouse
pointer makes a line parallel to local X-axis or local Y-axes. If the mouse is clicked in this
position a horizontal or vertical line is created.
• The length of the line segment currently being drawn is displayed in the bottom panel until
the user clicks the mouse.
• Pressing T will display a dialog box to accept the length and Angle of the line and the
currently drawn line segment with these parameters can be created by the user. The default
value of the Angle displayed is the angle of the currently drawn line segment.
• Pressing M will check if the currently drawn line segment is parallel or perpendicular to any
reference line segment and will highlight that line in red colour. The user can create this line
parallel or perpendicular to that reference line.
• Pressing M also checks if the current line segment is perpendicular or colinear to the last
drawn line segment. The system will then display the currently drawn segment in yellow
colour. The user can then create this line which is perpendicular or colinear to the last
segment.
• If the currently drawn line segment is parallel to any reference line, then the cursor stops
moving when the mouse is moved close to the length of the reference line and the length
display in the bottom panel also displays this condition. The user may click here to get the
current line parallel and of length equal to the reference line. The currently drawn line
segment will appear highlighted when the mouse pointer makes a line parallel to local X-axis
or local Y-axes.
• If the currently drawn line segment is preceded by an Arc then if it is close to tangent of the
arc, the currently drawn line is displayed in yellow colour and the user can create a tangent
this way. The tangent thus created maintains the continuity with the arc at the point of
tangency.
Once this point also is clicked in the drawing area, a line will be created connecting the previous
point and this point. The Point Marker will shift to the second point, indicating that the next line

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 50


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

segment will start from that point. The user will be simultaneously prompted to "Indicate Next
Point", where a third point can be indicated.

5.2.1.3 Features in Arc Creation mode

While in the Arc creation mode the following features are available in CollabCAD.

• Pressing A for the very first time will change the sketch mode from Line to Arc and sets the
default direction for arc creation. Pressing another "A" will toggle the direction for arc
creation.
• An Arc will be drawn starting from the last clicked point to the current mouse position
tangential to the last line.
• If the last segment drawn is an Arc the currently drawn arc will be created tangential to the
previous Arc, tangent at the end point of the last Arc.
• In the Arc creation mode, Pressing Q and clicking will select the end point of the currently
drawn Arc as the nearest point if the mouse is near any end point of reference entities.
• In the Arc creation mode, if the currently drawn arc becomes a semi-circle it is highlighted
in yellow colour and the user can create a semi-circular arc.
• Pressing N will display a dialog box to accept the Radius of Non-Tangent arc. The default
value of Radius displayed is that of currently drawn tangent arc segment. Then during mouse
move all possible non-tangent arc solutions will be displayed in different colour.
• Mouse Point within Arc Area: 4 possible arc segments (with 2 different centers) will be
displayed in 4 different colours. Then the user is prompted to press N and select one arc by
clicking closer to the center of the arc. Then the user can see only 1 of 2 possible arc segments
depending on mouse position. Then the user is prompted to click to create desired non -
tangent arc.
• Mouse Point outside of Arc Area: Only one of two possible Semi-Circles will be displayed
depending on mouse position. Then the user is prompted to click to create the desired non-
tangent arc.
• If the previous entity was a line, a perpendicular line will be displayed through end point of
the line, if that line became perpendicular to any of the currently drawn arc.
• Pressing T will display a dialog box to accept the Radius and Sweep Angle of the arc segment,
and the currently drawn arc segment with these parameters can be created by the user. The
default values of the Radius and Sweep Angle displayed are that of the currently drawn arc
segment. A Check box is available for the user to choose between setting the Sweep angle to
a fixed value by key in input or by using the mouse to fix the end of the arc. Sweep Angle is
the subtended angle made by both the end points of the arc at the center.
Each of the Keyboard interrupts is valid till the next mouse click only. For example, if A is pressed
to create an Arc, the next segment after the Arc is created will be a line. If the user wants to draw
another Arc, user has to press A again.
Once this point also is clicked in the drawing area, a line will be created connecting the previous
point and this point. The Point Marker will shift to the second point, indicating that the next line

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 51


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

segment will start from that point. The user will be simultaneously prompted to "Indicate Next
Point", where a third point can be indicated.
If the line/arc segment created is more than one, then it will prompt the user "Indicate Next point.
Press C to close", Pressing C will draw a line(which closes) between a previous point and the very
first point or otherwise clicking in the drawing area will create a line connecting the previous
and this point or carriage return will complete the polyline which will be open. When the user
presses 'enter' or "C" the Polyline is completed, and a Profile is created as a group of all the Lines
and Arcs. And again, it will prompt for "Indicate Next point". This process will continue until the
user select any another operation.

5.2.1.4 Features in Construction Line Creation mode


When User selects the Construction Line creation mode the following features are available in
CollabCAD:
• When the User presses "L" Temporary Horizontal and Vertical construction lines are created
corresponding to the end/mid points of lines/arcs. These construction lines would help in
creation of equal length line segments/stepped profiles etc.
• If user desire to draw the construction line from the focus point, he/she can press "P",
Pressing "P" will disable the Construction line and enable the inclined Construction Line.
• When the user presses "P" and Clicks the mouse for the first time to the point he intends to
make the focus point then, that point will be selected as a focus Point and the construction
line will be created
• On clicking the mouse for the second time the new line will be created starting from the last
Point to the intersection of the construction line with the current line only when the point
selected by the 2nd mouse click is collinear to focus point.
• When "P" is enabled, and the user does not intend to draw the inclined construction line then
Pressing "P" will disable the incline Construction Line and focus point.

5.2.2 Un-Group
With the Un-Group, the profile entities within the selected groups can be disassociated from that
group, and the entities can be individually selected/operated.

5.2.3 Select
By this option the user can create a Profile by selecting existing entities (Lines, Arcs and Profiles)
which are joined end to end (continuous). If the user selects non-continuous entities, then the
user is prompted with an error message.

5.2.4 Dimension
The user can select any segment of the Profile for creating an Associative Dimension and then
modify it.
• The System prompts for ' Indicate Dimension Reference' The user can select any segment of
the profile

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 52


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Then the System prompts ' Indicate Text Position The user can click at the position where
the dimension is to be placed.
On creating Dimensions, the user effectively Constraints the profile. Fixed Length Constraints are
set for the dimensioned Line Segments. Fixed Radius Constraints are set for the dimensioned Arc
Segments. If a segment of the profile is already dimensioned, the system does not allow it to be
dimensioned again. A message is displayed indicating 'Dimension already exists for this
segment'.

5.2.5 Modification of Profile


The profile can be Modified by modifying the Dimension. Using the Modify option under the edit
menu, user can select the dimension of the Profile and change the text to the required value. This
will modify the Profile and redisplay the new profile. If there is an error the system will prompt
'Could not solve all Relations' and the Dimension Text value will not be modified.
The user can also modify the position of the Dimension by using the Modify option. When the
user is prompted to "Specify entities to Modify and press Enter" the user can pick any Profile
Dimension entity and drag the mouse (by keeping the mouse button pressed). When the mouse
button is released the dimension is recreated at the new mouse position .

5.3 2D Constraints
5.3.1 Types of 2D Constraints
The following types of 2 Dimensional Constraints are implemented in Part Mode.
• Horizontal
• Vertical
• Collinear
• Co-radial
• Perpendicular
• Parallel
• Parallel with Distance
• Tangent
• Concentric
• Coincident
• Equal Length/Radius
• Symmetric
• Fix
• Ratio
• Angular

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 53


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Linear
• Radial
• Distance
• Colour Coding
Following error messages might come while applying Constraints:
• Conflict Constraint already exists: If an entity is constrained and we try to apply a conflicting
constraint on it.
• Constraint already exists: If we try to apply the same constraint on an entity more than once.

5.3.1.1 Horizontal Constraint


With this choice, user can define Horizontal Constraint. To define Horizontal Constraint, go to
Constraints menu then click Horizontal. If the user clicks on Horizontal menu, the system
prompts the following message in the status bar
• Select Line and Press Enter
Before After

Figure 5-1: 2D Horizontal Constraint

Select the line and then press enter. This Constraint makes the selected line Parallel to the X -
axis. When the constraints are applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Line" will be
displayed in status bar.

5.3.1.2 Vertical Constraint


With this choice, user can define Vertical Constraint. To define Vertical Constraint, go to
Constraints menu then click Vertical. If the user clicks on Vertical menu, the system prompts the
following message in the status bar. Select Line and Press Enter. Select the line and press Enter.
This Constraint makes the selected line Parallel to the Y - axis.

Before After

Figure 5-2: 2D Vertical Constraint

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 54


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

When the constraints are applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Line" will be
displayed in status bar.

5.3.1.3 Collinear Constraint


With this choice, user can define Collinear constraint. To define Collinear constraint, go to
Constraints menu then select Collinear. If the user clicks on Collinear menu, the system prompts
the following messages. User can select either line or arc.
• Select first entity
• Select second entity and Press enter
• Select the First Line/Point (this Line/Point will be the Reference Arc) and then Select the
Second Line/Point and press enter.
Before After

Figure 5-3: 2D Collinear Constraint

Collinear constraint aligns second entity such that both entities are Collinear. When the
constraints are applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Entity1 and Entity 2" will be
displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow
the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first entity such that the first
entity becomes Collinear with the second entity.

5.3.1.4 Co-radial Constraint


With this choice, user can define Co-radial constraint. To define Co-radial constraint, go to
Constraints menu then click Co-radial. If the user clicks on Co-radial menu, the system prompts
the following messages in the status bar.

Before After

Figure 5-4: 2D Co-radial Constraint

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 55


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Select First arc


• Select Second arc and Press Enter
• Select the First Arc (this Arc will be the Reference Arc) and then Select the Second Arc
and press enter.
Co-radial constraint aligns second arc such that the two arcs share the same center point and
have same radius. When the constraints are applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with
Arc1 and Arc 2" will be displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a
constraint which will not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it
aligns first arc such that the two arcs share the same center point and have same radius.

5.3.1.5 Perpendicular Constraint


With this choice, user can define Perpendicular constraint. To define Perpendicular constraint,
go to Constraints menu then to Perpendicular. If the user clicks on Perpendicular menu, the
system prompts the following messages. User has to select line.
• Select first entity
• Select second entity and Press enter
Select the First Line (this Line will be the Reference Line) and then Select the Second Line
and press enter.
Before After

Figure 5-5: Perpendicular Constraint

Perpendicular constraint aligns second entity such that both entities becomes perpendicular to
each other.

Before After

Figure 5-6: Perpendicular Constraint - One entity is already constrained

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 56


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

When the constraints are applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Entity1 and Entity
2" will be displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will
not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first entity such that
the first entity becomes perpendicular with the second entity. In figure Line A is already having
Fixed constrained, so the Line C which will be moved to make the lines Perpendicular.

5.3.1.6 Parallel Constraint


With this choice, user can define Parallel constraint. To define Parallel constraint, go to
Constraints menu then click Parallel. If the user clicks on Parallel menu, the system prompts the
following messages in the status bar.
• Select first entity
• Select second entity and Press enter
• Select the First Line (this Line will be the Reference Line) and then Select the Second Line
and press enter.
Before After

Figure 5-7: Parallel Constraint

Parallel constraint aligns second entity such that both entities becomes parallel to each other. When
the constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Entity1 and Entity 2" will be
displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow
the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first entity such that the first
entity becomes parallel with the second entity.

Before After

Figure 5-8: Parallel Constraint - One entity is already constrained

In figure Line A is already constrained, so Line C which will be moved to make the lines parallel.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 57


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

5.3.1.7 Parallel with Distance Constraint


With this choice, user can define Parallel with Distance Constraint. To define Parallel with
Distance Constraint, Go to Constraints menu then click Parallel with Distance. If the user clicks
on Parallel with Distance menu, the system prompts the following messages in the status bar.
• Select First Line
• Select Second Line and Press Enter
• Select the First Entity (this entity will be the Reference entity) and then Select the Second
entity and press enter.
• Give the distance that is required between those two lines when the pop up comes.
The first selected entity is used as reference. The Parallel with Distance constraint aligns the
second selected entity in such a way that it becomes Parallel to the first entity at the specified
Distance.
When the constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with entity1 and entity 2"
will be displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will
not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns the first entity such
that it is Parallel the second line at the specified Distance.

5.3.1.8 Tangent Constraint


With this choice, user can define Tangent constraint. To define Tangent constraint, go to
Constraints menu then to Tangent. If the user clicks on Tangent menu, the system prompts the
following messages.
• Select line or arc
• If user selects arc, then user is prompted to Select line and Press enter
• If user selects line, then user is prompted to Select arc and Press enter
Before After

Figure 5-9: Tangent Constraint

Tangent constraint aligns second entity such that both entities becomes Tangent to each other.
When the constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Entity1 and Entity 2"
will be displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 58


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first entity such that
the first entity becomes Tangent with the second entity.

Before After

Figure 5-10: Tangent Constraint - One entity is already constrained

In the Figure Circle C is fixed and Circle A which is already constrained will be moving towards
Circle C with all its constrained entities (Circle B).

5.3.1.9 Concentric Constraint


With this choice, user can define Concentric constraint. To define Concentric constraint, go to
Constraints menu then select Concentric. If the user clicks on Concentric menu, the system
prompts the following messages. User can select either Circle or arc:
• Select first entity
• Select second entity and Press enter
• Select the First Circle/Arc (this Circle/Arc will be the Reference Arc) and then Select the
Second Circle/Arc and press enter.
Before After

Figure 5-11: Concentric Constraint

Concentric constraint aligns second entity such that both entities are Concentric. When the
constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Entity1 and Entity 2" will be
displayed in status bar.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 59


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Before After

Figure 5-12: Concentric Constraint – One entity already constrained

If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and
the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first entity such that the first entity becomes
Concentric with the second entity. In the figure Arc C is already fixed so Arc A and Arc B will be
moved towards Arc C.

5.3.1.10 Coincident Constraint


With this choice, user can define coincidence constraint. To define Coincidence constraint, go to
Constraints menu then select Coincidence. If the user clicks on coincidence menu, the system
prompts the following messages. User can select either line or arc.
• Select first entity
• Select second entity and Press enter
• Select the First Line/Point (this Line/Point will be the Reference Arc) and then select the
Second Line/Point and press enter.
Before After

Figure 5-13: Coincident Constraint

Coincidence constraint aligns second entity such that both entities are coincident. When the
constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with Entity1 and Entity 2" will be
displayed in status bar.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 60


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

5.3.1.11 Equal Length/Radius Constraint


With this choice, user can define Equal Length/Radius constraint. To define Equal Length/Radius
constraint, go to Constraints menu then click Equal Length/Radius. If the user clicks on Equal
Length/Radius menu, the system prompts the following messages in the status bar.
• Select First Entity
• Select Second Entity and Press Enter
• Select the First Entity (this entity will be the Reference entity) and then Select the Second
entity and press enter.
The first selected entity is used as reference. The Equal Length/Radius constraint modifies the
second selected entity in such a way that it becomes equal (same dimensions) to the first entity.
In the case of line, the length will be modified and in the case of Arc the radius would be made
Equal.
When the constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with entity1 and entity 2"
will be displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will
not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to modify, then it aligns the first entity
such that it is similar in dimensions to the First entity. Equal distance constraint can be used in
following combinations: Length -Length, Radial-Radial. If the user applies this constraint to two
entities and then modifies one entity, then the second entity will also get modified according to
that.

5.3.1.12 Symmetric Constraint


With this choice, user can define Symmetry constraint. To define Symmetry constraint, go to
Constraints menu then click Symmetry. If the user clicks on Symmetry menu, the system prompts
the following messages in the status bar.
• Select Line or Arc
• Select Second Line/Arc
• Select Center Line and Press Enter.
• If user selects Line first, then the second entity to be selected must be Line and if user selects
arc then the second entity to be selected must be arc.
Select the First Entity (this entity will be the Reference entity) and then Select the Second
entity and then Select the Center line with respect to which the symmetry should be created
and press enter.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 61


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Before After

Figure 5-14: Symmetric Constraint

The first selected entity is used as reference. The Symmetry constraint modifies the second
selected entity in such a way that the two entities will become Symmetric about the Center Line
with the second entity retaining all the properties from the first entity. When the constraint is
applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with entity1 and entity 2" will be displayed in
status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow the entity
to move and the first entity is free to modify, then it aligns the first entity such that it is similar
in dimensions to the Second entity.

5.3.1.13 Fix Constraint


With this choice, user can define Fixed constraint. To define Fixed constraint, go to Constraints
menu then select Fix. If the user clicks on Fix menu, the system prompts the following messages in
the status bar.
• Select the entity
• If the user selects Line and presses enter a dialog box will pop up with following Fix types:
o Start Point: Start point of the line will be fixed.
o End Point: End point will be fixed.
o Length: Length of the line will remain constant. (User can change the length of the
line by selecting Modify entity)
o All: All of the above will be fixed.
User have to select which property of the line is to be fixed,
• If the user selects an arc, then a dialog box will pop up with following Fix types:
o Radius: Radius will be fixed.
o Center Point: Center Point will be fixed.
o All: Both radius and center point will be fixed.
User have to select which property of the arc is to be fixed. (User can change the radius of the arc
by selecting Modify entity)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 62


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

5.3.1.14 Ratio Constraint


With this choice, user can define Ratio constraint. To define Ratio constraint, go to Constraints
menu then click Ratio. If the user clicks on Ratio menu, the system prompts the following
messages in the status bar.
• Select First Entity
• Select Second Entity and Press Enter
• Select the First Entity (this entity will be the Reference entity) and then Select the Second
entity and press enter.
• Specify the ratio in the pop-up window.
The first selected entity is used as reference. The Ratio constraint modifies the second selected
entity in such a way that it becomes proportional to the given value (Ratio) with respect to the
first entity. In the case of line, the length will be modified and in the case of Arc the radius would
be modified depending upon the value specified. If the user modifies the first entity, then the
second entity will automatically adjust itself according the ratio specified before. When the
constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with entity1 and entity 2" will be
displayed in status bar.

5.3.1.15 Angular Constraint


With this choice, user can define Angle constraint. To define Angle constraint, go to Constraints
menu then click Angle. If the user clicks on Angle menu, the system prompts the following
messages in the status bar.
• Select First Line
• Select Second Line and Press Enter
• Select the First Entity (this entity will be the Reference
entity) and then Select the Second entity and press enter.
• Specify the angle between those two lines when the pop
up comes. Figure 5-15: Angular Constraint
The first selected entity is used as reference. The Angle
constraint aligns the second selected entity in such a way that it makes the given angle with the
first entity. When the constraint is applied then message " Defined 2D Constraint with entity1
and entity 2" will be displayed in status bar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint
which will not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns the first
entity such that it makes the specified angle with the second line.

5.3.1.16 Linear Constraint


With this choice, user can define Linear constraint. To define Linear constraint, go to Constraints
menu then click Linear. If the user clicks on Linear menu, the system prompts the following
message in the status bar.
• Select Line

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 63


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Select the Entity and press enter.


It maintains the given length constant for the line.

5.3.1.17 Radial Constraint


With this choice, user can define Radial constraint. To define
Radial constraint, go to Constraints menu then click Radial. If the
user clicks on Radial menu, the system prompts the following
message in the status bar.
• Select Arc
• Select the Entity and press enter.
User can modify the radius by selecting the Modify entity option
from Edit Menu. Figure 5-16: Radial Constraint

5.3.1.18 Distance Constraint


With this choice, user can define Distance constraint. To define Distance constraint, go to
Constraints menu then click Distance. If the user clicks on Distance menu, the system prompts
the following messages in the status bar.
• Select First Line
• Select Second Line and Press Enter
Select the First Entity (this entity will be the Reference entity) and then Select the Second entity
and press enter. Give the distance between those two lines when the pop up comes.

5.3.2 Colour Coding


Colour coding scheme tells user the constraint status of a particular entity. Whenever user
applies or deletes a constraint on a particular entity, colour of the entity will be changed
according to its current constraint status. When we create a Line/Arc, it will come in Green colour
as it is unconstrained. In case of Profile, colour will be Yellow as all the Profile sub-entities are
Partially Constrained. Colour Coding for 2D Constrained Entity:
Unconstrained -> Green
Partial Constrained -> Yellow
Fully Constrained -> Red

5.3.2.1 For Single Entity


If user applies a constraint on an unconstrained entity, the colour of the entity will change based
on the status of constraints applied on it i.e. entity will become yellow if it gets partially
constrained else it will become Red if it gets fully constrained.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 64


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Unconstrained Entity Partially Constrained Entity Fully Constrained Entity

Figure 5-17: Colour Coding – Single Entity

5.3.2.2 For Two Entities

5.3.2.2.1 Partially Constrained


If user applies a constraint such that both the entities will become partially constrained, then the
colour of both the entities will become Yellow.

Unconstrained Entities Partially Constrained Entities

Figure 5-18: Colour Coding: Two Entities - Partially Constrained

5.3.2.2.2 Fully Constrained


If user applies constraints such that both the entities will become fully constrained, then the
colour of both the entities will become Red.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 65


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Only 1 entity is fully constrained Both entities are fully constrained

Figure 5-19: Colour Coding: Fully Constrained

5.3.2.2.3 Deletion of Constraints on Selected Entity/All 2D


If user deletes any constraint from an entity, the constraint status of that entity will change.
Hence similar to applying of constraints, if the entity after deletion gets partially constrained,
then the entity will become yellow and if the entity gets unconstrained, then it will become green
in colour.

5.3.3 Modify
Constraint Value can be modified by following ways.

5.3.3.1 By Entity
Select the entity and chooses which constraint is to be modified. The entity changes according to
the value specified by the user. When user chooses Constraints --> Modify 2D Constraint value,
the Status bar display messages: Select entity.
It prompts a new dialog box with list of constraints that entity has. Select the required constraint
entity and modify the value.

5.3.3.2 By Dimension
Here the constraint value is changed, and the entity reshapes accordingly. For example, if a user
uses Parallel with Distance constraint to specify the distance between two lines and list the
constraints on the canvas then he can change the value of the list constraint and the entity
changes accordingly.
User select entity, a message dialog box will be displayed with the names of the relations that are
applied on the selected entity. If there are no relations on the selected entity, message
'Unconstrained' will be displayed.
Example: In Figure, Parallel with distance constraint is shown in blue markings. Select Modify 2D
Constraint value and click at an entity, a message dialog box will appear, select the constraint
from pop-up under heading 'Select constraint' and click ok. Enter the desired value in Text field
shown in CAD canvas and entity modified accordingly.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 66


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 5-20: Constraint modification

Note: '2D Constraint value' can also be done using Toolbar icon 'Modify'. User can Modify
constraint of an entity using tree panel. Go to Tree Panel, click at '2D Constraints', again click at
a node and right click the constraint leads to option 'Modify', selecting same would give
appropriate result.
Not all constraints can be modified. Constraint with dimensions only can be modified. Parallel
with distance, Linear, Distance, Radial, Angle, Ratio are the modifiable constraints.

5.3.4 Delete
5.3.4.1 On Selected Entities
If the user clicks on Constraints -> Delete Constraints ->
On Selected Entity menu, the system prompts the
following messages: Select the Entity
When user selects an entity, then a dialog box will be
displayed with the names of the relations applied on the
selected entity. User can select the relation for the
deletion. If the user selects "All constraints" checkbox, Figure 5-21: Parameters while deleting a
constraint
then all the constraints present on the selected entity will
be deleted. If the user deleted X relation, then message "Deleted X relation" will be displayed in
status bar. If user clicks on the Delete All relations checkbox then "Deleted all Relations of the
selected entity" will be displayed in status bar.
Note: User can Delete constraint of an entity using tree panel. Go to Tree Panel, click at '2D
Constraints', again click at a node and right click the constraint leads to option 'Delete Relation',
selecting same would give appropriate result.

5.3.4.2 All 2D Constraints


If the user clicks on Constraints -> Delete Constraints -> All 2D Constraints menu, then all the 2D
constraints of all the entities will be deleted. A message 'Deleted All 2D Constraints' will be
displayed in status bar

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 67


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

5.3.5 Degree of Freedom


Degree of Freedom (DOF) can be checked between maximum of two entities. DOF can be checked
in CollabCAD by invoking by the menu "Constraints -> Degrees of Freedom. User can check the
DOF for a Line / Arc and combination of "Line-Line", "Line-Arc" and "Arc-Arc". To check for a
single entity, select the entity and press "Enter" key; for two entities select both entities and
CollabCAD will pop-up the Allowable Constraints window to the user.

5.3.5.1 For Single Entity


• Unconstrained: If user selects an
Unconstrained entity and press enter, a
dialog box will appear which prompts the
user that it is an Unconstrained entity. Click
on Ok. It will display the list of Allowable
constraints.
• Partial Constrained: If user selects a
Partially constrained entity and press enter,
a dialog box will appear which displays the
list of Allowable constraints.
Figure 5-22: Unconstraint line entity with list of
Allowable Constraints
5.3.5.2 For Two Entities
• Unconstrained: If user selects
Unconstrained entities, a dialog box will
appear which prompts the user that they are
Unconstrained entities. Click on Ok. It will
display the list of Allowable constraints.
• Partial Constrained: If user selects Partially
constrained entities, a dialog box will
appear which displays the list of Allowable
constraints.
• Fully Constrained: If user selects Fully
constrained entities, a dialog box will
Figure 5-23: Partially Constrained line entity
appear which prompts the user that they are with list of Allowable Constraints
Fully constrained entities.

5.3.6 List Constraints


When a user clicks on List Constraints, it prompts to select the entity on which user want to list
the constraints. Once the user selects entity, a message dialog box will be displayed with the
names of the relations that are applied on the selected entity. If there are no relations on the
selected entity, then 'Unconstrained' will be displayed.

5.3.7 Symbols
5.3.7.1 Display

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 68


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

When a user clicks on Display Symbol menu, the system prompts the following message: Select
entity and Press enter. A message dialog box will be displayed. The user can select the required
constraint/constraints. When user clicks on OK button, the selected constraint symbols are
displayed.

5.3.7.2 Hide
When a user clicks on Hide Symbol menu, the system prompts the following messages: Select the
entity/Symbol. Selection of the entity would hide all the symbols applied on that entity and
selection of the symbol would hide that symbol from the Canvas.
Note: User can Blank / Un-Blanked constraint of an entity using tree panel. Go to Tree Panel, click
at '2D Constraints', again click at a node and right click the constraint leads to options like 'Blank
/ Un-blank', selecting same would give appropriate result.

5.3.7.3 Modify Size


When a user clicks on Modify Size menu, the system prompts the following message: Select the
Symbol. Selection of the symbol will open a pop up to change "Symbol Font Size". It will show
current size of symbol. User can change the font size by giving new value and press ok. It will
show symbol with modified font size.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 69


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 6. Curves

6.1 Introduction
CollabCAD supports a variety of 2D/3D curve entities. Easy-to-use interfaces are provided for
creation of each of these entities. An entity can be created using any of the following methods.
• Using the mouse by invoking the operation from the Tool Bar: In this method, the inputs
required for creation of the entity is provided by clicking the mouse in the drawing area.
When the required number of inputs are given the entity will be created and displayed. The
user will be in the entity creation mode until another operation is selected.
• Using the keyboard by invoking the operation from the Menu Bar: When this method is
invoked a dialog box will appear in which the user can enter various parameters related to
the given entity. When the OK button is pressed after entering the inputs, the dialog box
disappears for a moment and the entity is displayed. The dialog box will then re-appear, and
the user can create another entity or press the Cancel button to terminate the entity creation
process.
The following curve entities creation and editing operations are currently supported.
• Ellipse
• Parabola
• Hyperbola
• Helix
• Spiral
• Involute
• Bezier
• B-Spline
• Offset
• Trim
• Explore

6.2 Ellipse
Ellipse can be created in following methods.

6.2.1 Screen Position


In this method, the user will be prompted to click first corner of the bounding box of the ellipse.
After indicating it, the user can specify the second corner of the bounding box of the ellipse. (The
user can key in the half major axis and half minor axis by giving keyboard input by pressing 'T')
On successful input, an ellipse is created.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 70


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.2.2 Center and Corner


In this method, the user will be prompted to click center of the ellipse. After indicating it, the user
can specify the corner of the bounding box of the ellipse. (The user can key in the half major axis
and half minor axis by giving keyboard input by pressing 'T') On successful input, an ellipse is
created.

6.2.3 Two Arcs


With this option, users can create an ellipse with reference to two concentric arcs, and at a
specified angle of inclination. On invoking the operation, the system would prompt for the first
and second arcs, and the angle of rotation of the ellipse. The new ellipse would be created at the
specified angle with its center at the center of the arcs and axes as their diameters. If the circles
are not concentric then an error message would be flagged.

6.2.4 Rectangle
With this option, users can create an ellipse with reference to a rectangle. On invoking the
operation, the system would prompt for a rectangular profile or a set of lines forming a rectangle.
On successful selection, an ellipse would be created with reference to the selected entities.

6.2.5 Key-In
On invoking the operation from menu bar, a dialog box will be displayed for the user to enter the
co-ordinates of the center of ellipse and the major and minor radii. Further it asks for the start
angle and the end angle of the ellipse. These are the angles at which the ellipse should start and
end with respect to the positive X axis. User provides the angle of rotation of the ellipse with
respect to the positive X axis. Once all the inputs are correctly given the ellipse (or elliptical arc)
will be created and displayed.
The user can select the view in which the ellipse is to be created.

Figure 6-1: Parameters of Ellipse creation

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 71


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.3 Parabola
Parabola can be created only by using key board input. On invoking the operation from menu
bar, a dialog box will be displayed for the user to enter the co-ordinates of the center of parabola
and the focal length. It also asks for start point and end point of the parabola. User also provides
an angle of rotation of the parabola with respect to the positive X axis. Once all the inputs are
correctly given the parabola will be created and displayed.The user can select the view in which
the Parabola is to be created.

Figure 6-2: Parameters of Parabola creation

6.4 Hyperbola
Hyperbola can be created only by using key board input. On invoking the operation from menu
bar, a dialog box will be displayed for the user to enter the co-ordinates of the center of hyperbola
and the major and minor radii. Further it asks for the start angle and the end angle of the
hyperbola. These are the angles at which the Hyperbola should start and end with respect to the
Positive X axis. Besides, the user has to provide the angle of rotation of the Hyperbola with
respect to the Positive X axis. Once all the inputs are correctly given the hyperbola (or hyperbolic
arc) will be created and displayed. The user can select the View in which the hyperbola is to be
created.

Figure 6-3: Parameters of Hyperbola creation

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 72


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.5 Helix
Helix can be created only by using key board input. On invoking the operation from menu bar, a
dialog box will be displayed for the user to enter the co-ordinates of the start and end radii of
helix. Further it asks for the pitch and length of the helix. It also asks for the angle of rotation of
the helix and the no. of segments per revolution required for approximation. (For example, if the
helix is defined in the front view then the length is defined along the X-axis and the angle of
rotation is given anti-clockwise with respect to the positive X-axis). Once all the inputs are
correctly given the helix will be created and displayed. The user can select the view in which the
Helix is to be created.

Figure 6-4: Parameters of Helix creation

6.6 Spiral
Spiral entities can be created by using key board input. On invoking the operation from menu
bar, a dialog box would be displayed for the user to enter the parameters such as the work plane
of the spiral, co-ordinate of its center, the start radius, start angle, and the number of segments
per revolution approximation (the minimum number of segments is 6). Further, user selects the
type of the spiral from the list. Depending on type, the user has to enter other parameters as
follows:
• End Angle-Pitch: In this case user enters end angle, pitch and revolution.
• End Angle-End Radius: In this case user enters end angle, end radius and revolution.
• End Radius-Pitch: In this case user enters end radius, pitch and revolution. Once all the
inputs are correctly given the spiral will be created and displayed.
Note: The following assumptions / conditions are applied in creation of spiral
• If Start Angle is 360 Degrees, it is assumed as ZERO degree
• If End Angle is ZERO degree, it is assumed as 360 degrees.
• Negative angular values are converted into positive (e.g. -90 = 270).
• End Radius must be greater than Start Radius.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 73


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• For 1 revolution End Angle must be greater than Start angle.

Figure 6-5: Parameters of Spiral creation

6.7 Involute
Involute is the curve formed by the path of a point on a straight line as the line unwinds along
the circumference of a base circle. This is generally used as the profile of a gear teeth. If a circular
disc was placed on a drawing board, an involute curve would be scribed by the end of a taut line
if it was unwound from the disc. The disc represents what is known as the base circle because
this is the circle from which the involute tooth curves are derived. Involute can be created in
following two different methods.

6.7.1 Key-in
In this method, on invoking the operation from menu bar, a dialog box will be displayed for the
user to enter the co-ordinates of the center of base circle, start point of the involute curve and
the end point at which the involute ends. It also asks for the number of segments to be used for
approximations. Once all the inputs are correctly given the involute curve will be created and
displayed.

6.7.2 Screen Position


In this method, the user is asked to click the center of the base circle. Then the user is asked to
indicate the start point of the involute curve. The user is then asked to click the End point. Once
all the points are correctly given, an Involute curve will be created and displayed in the chosen
plane. The End point is indicated to give the circumference of the circle on which the end of the
Involute curve will lie. The direction of the involute curve is determined by the position of the

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 74


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

end point w.r.t Start point. The user can select the View in which the Involute curve is to be
created.

Figure 6-6: Parameters of Involute creation

6.8 Bezier
A Bezier curve is defined by a table of poles, also called "control points" (together with the
associated weights if the curve is rational), which are used to deform the curve.
There are two methods to create a Bezier curve
• Control Points
• Convert
• Set Parameter

6.8.1 Control Points


The Bezier curve is created using control points. The user is prompted to "Specify point position".
The user may then click anywhere in the drawing area and a temporary point marker will be
created at that point. The user can continue adding control points for the Bezier curve. The user
presses "enter" to signify end of input. The Bezier curve is then created using these control
points. Minimum 2 points and maximum 25 points are required to create a Bezier curve.

6.8.2 Convert
With this choice, the user can create a Bezier curve by converting an existing curve. After
conversion, more than one Bezier curve may be created. The resultant Bezier geometry is
infinitely smooth, i.e. it is Cn-continuous in its every point. At every point in the original geometry
where Cn criterion is broken, such geometry is split. Default selection is 'All Curves' i.e. all curve
types are selectable. To use other options (Lines or Arcs or Conics or Splines) disable the 'All
Curves' option and enable the required selection filter. Select the curves and press Enter, system

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 75


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

will generate the Bezier curves. To set new selection filter, restart the operation from the menu
bar. The system prompts with the following messages for the user.
• Curve to convert: Select the type of curve(s) to convert. Default all curves are set. Multiple
selection is enabled.
• Specify curves to convert: Use the mouse to select existing curves and then hit the 'Enter'
key. Use the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve.

6.8.3 Set Parameter


With this choice, the user can create a Bezier curve by setting its first (start) and last (end)
parameter. It will create a new Bezier curve (portion of the original basis curve) limited by two
parameter values in the parametric domain of the basis curve (existing Bezier curve). An option
to retain the basis curve is available after setting new parameters. The parameter range for a
Bezier curve is [0.0,1.0]. This type of curve is also created when a Bezier curve is trimmed by any
other CADCurve (line, arc, bspline, etc.) during Curves-Trim operation.

6.9 B-Spline
A B-Spline curve is defined by:
• its degree,
• its periodic or non-periodic characteristic,
• a table of poles, also called control points (together with the associated weights if the curve
is rational), and
• a table of knots, together with the associated multiplicities.
A B-Spline Curve can be:
• uniform or non-uniform,
• rational or non-rational,
• periodic or non-periodic.
The poles of the curve are the points used to shape and reshape the curve. A rational B-spline is
a piecewise, rational polynomial; that is, the numerator and the denominator are both B-splines.
A nonuniform, rational B-spline (NURBS) curve is a mapping of one variable, t, from the
parametric domain into 3-D space X(t)/W(t), Y(t)/W(t), Z(t)/W(t) where each component is a
rational B-spline. The intervals of the parametric domain may be of unequal length. The B-spline
curves are represented by coefficients called control points and rational blending functions. For
convenience, the control points Pi = (xi, yi, zi, wi) are in 4-D space with x, y, z being 3-D model
coordinates and w being the weight.
A rational B-spline curve is defined by:
• The order of the curve (order = degree + 1).
• The number of segments.
• The breakpoint sequence.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 76


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• The multiplicity at inner breakpoints.


• The series of 4-D control points where the first three coordinates are the model x, y, z-
coordinates and the last coordinate is the weight.
There are different methods to create a B-Spline curve and options for user-controlled repair and
modify.
• Approximation
• Interpolation
• Equation Driven
• Extend
• Iso-parametric
• Convert
• Concatenate
• Blending
• Modify Poles
• Remove Knot
• Split - At Knots
• Modify B-Spline Curve Geometry

6.9.1 Approximation
With this choice, the user can create a 3D B-Spline curve by approximating a set of points (actual
data). The system prompts for the user to specify points. Then press the 'Enter' key after the last
point is specified to create the curve. The user can create a 3D B-Spline curve both in rubber band
and non-rubber band mode. With rubber band mode on, the user will get a b-spline curve (white
colour) for each click from the second click onwards. By completing the operation, the user will
get the desired b-spline curve with green colour. Each click is the data point on the curve. On the
other hand, if the rubber band option is off the user will get point markers in red colour for each
click (data points of the b-spline curve) and by pressing the enter key finally, the user will get the
required b-spline curve. The resulting curve is at least C2 continuous, minimum degree of 3.
Error messages:
• The system checks for null data points, if null then the system displays an error message box:
Input Error: Too few points to create B-Spline curve.
• If a B-Spline curve is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception: B-Spline curve not created

6.9.2 Interpolation
With this choice, the user can create a 3D B-Spline curve by approximating a set of points which
are on the curve, not control points. The system prompts for the user to specify points. The user
can create a 3D B-Spline curve both in rubber band and non-rubber band mode. With rubber

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 77


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

band mode on, the user will get a b-spline curve (white colour) for each click from the second
click onwards. Then press 'Enter' key to prompt for a dialog box showing the current tangent
vector coordinates of both ends of the computed b-spline curve. The user can continue with the
current tangent constraint or modify its coordinates to recompute the b-spline curve. By
completing the operation (hit the OK button), the user will get the desired b-spline curve (green
colour). Each click is the data point on the curve. On the other hand, if the rubber band option is
off the user will get point markers in red colour for each click (data points of the b-spline curve)
and by pressing the enter key finally, the user will get the required b-spline curve. The resulting
curve is C2 continuous.

Figure 6-7: Interpolation B-spline Curve

Error messages:
• The system checks for null data points, if null then the system displays an error message box:
Input Error: Too few points to create B-Spline curve.
• If a B-Spline curve is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception: B-Spline curve not created.

6.9.3 Equation Driven


With this choice, the user can create a 3D B-Spline curve using
parametric equations. When user selects this option, a dialog box will
pop up and prompts user to 'Enter Parametric Equations'.
User enters parametric equation for Xt, Yt and Zt in terms of parameter
't'. e.g. cost(t), sin(t), cos(t) + sin(2*t). Always use parentheses around
expression arguments and use * for multiplication, / for division, ^ for
exponentiation.
'tmin' and 'tmax' defines the range for parametric equation X t, Yt and Zt. The
parametric range variables 't min' and 'tmax' will accept numerical Figure 6-8: Parameters for
values or multiplies of pi like 2*pi, 5*pi. parametric equation

Example of parametric equation:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 78


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Xt = cost(t)
Yt = sin(t)
Zt = t
tmin = 0
t max = 15*pi

Figure 6-9: Parametric B-spline curve

On completion, a b-spline curve defined by the parametric equation will be created.


Error messages:
• The system checks for invalid equations, if parametric equation is not correct then the
system displays an error message box: Input Error: Invalid Parametric Equation
• If a B-Spline curve is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception: B-Spline curve not created

6.9.4 Extend
With this choice, the user can create a B-Spline curve by extending any bounded 3D curve to a
point position or curve boundary. The selected curve is deleted to create a new b-spline curve.
The system prompts for the user to specify curve to be extended.
• Specify curve to extend: Use the mouse to select an existing curve near the end which is to
be extended.
• Select a point or a curve: Use the mouse to select existing point or curve to which the curve
is to be extended.
A dialog box prompts with parameters controlling the extension.
Degree of continuity: Select 1,2 or 3 from the combo-box list
Error messages:
If the curve is not created, the system displays an error message box:
• Remote Exception: B-Spline curve by extend failed

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 79


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.9.5 Iso-parametric
With this choice, the user can create two or four B-spline curves along the edges of the B-spline
surface or passing through a point lying on the surface. The system prompts with the following
messages for the user.

• Specify a B-spline surface: Use the mouse to select an existing b-spline surface. User cannot
select a trim face entity.
• A dialog box prompts with parameters to be selected.
• Curve creation: Select U Edges, V Edges, All Edges, Specify Point from the combo-box list.
In U or V edges, 2 curves are created and in ‘All Edges’ method four iso-parametric b-spline
curves are created along its edges. The Specify point position method requires a surface point or
a point is projected normally on to the surface based on the screen position. Two new curves are
created in this method.
Error messages:
If the curve is not created, the system displays an error message box:
Remote Exception: Curve not created

6.9.6 Convert
With this choice, the user can create an equivalent B-Spline curve by converting an existing curve.
The curve to be converted must be finite i.e. parametric bounds is finite. The orientation of the
resulting b-spline curve is same as the selected curve. On selecting a curve, a dialog pops up to
choose the type of conversion (Direct/Parameters). If the user wants to go for direct conversion,
select the 'Direct' option. The additional options are enabled if 'Parameters' option is chosen.
This is an approximation technique of b-spline conversion within a tolerance. If the user wants
to specify the maximum number of segments for the resulting b-spline curve, select 'Parameters'
option.
Here the user needs to enter the values, the maximum number of segments 'MaxSegments'
allowed in the resulting b-Spline curve and the highest degree 'MaxDeg' which the polynomial
defining the b-spline curve may have.
• Specify curves to convert and press Enter: Use the mouse to select an existing curve and then
select type of conversion, if required enter the input parameters and then hit the 'Enter' key.
Use the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve.
• Specify curves to convert and press Enter: Use the mouse to select an existing curve and then
select type of Conversion, if required enter the input parameters and then hit the 'Enter' key.
Use the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve.
Error messages:
• If a B-Spline curve is not created by conversion, the system displays an error message box:
Remote Exception: B-Spline curve not created by conversion
• If a curve is selected is not a bounded curve (finite), the system displays an error message
box: Input Error: Not a bounded curve

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 80


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.9.7 Concatenate
With this choice, the user can create a single B-Spline curve by concatenating a series of
connected 3D curves (line, arc, b-spline curves, etc.). The tolerance value of 0.001 is used to check
the distance continuity between two successive curves. A dialog with checkbox option to retain
the original curves is available. The system prompts with the following messages for the user.
Specify curve(s) to concatenate and press Enter: Use the mouse to
select existing curves and then hit the 'Enter' key. Use the 'Esc' key to
reject an already selected curve
A dialog box prompts with a checkbox option to retain the original
curves
Retain Curves: To retain the original curves activate the check box else
the curves will be deleted after concatenation. Figure 6-10: Option to retain
curves while concatenating
Error messages: B-Spline curves

• If at least, two of the curves are not connected at their end points,
the system displays an error message box: Remote Exception: Curves are not continuous
• If a single curve is selected, the system displays an error message box: Input Error: Only one
curve selected

6.9.8 Blending
With this choice, user can create a new b-spline curve by joining the ends of two different curves
or the start/end of the same curve can be 'filled' by blending. The new curve created respects the
tangency condition of the curve ends while blending (filling). The user selects one or two existing
curves with the ends to fill the new b-spline curve.
The user is prompted to select the first curve end. On selecting the first curve end the user is
prompted to select the second curve end or the other end of the same first curve. On selecting
the curve end, the user will get a new b-spline curve between the two ends of the selected
curve(s). The ends will be decided with the clicked point while selecting the curve. The end point
is always nearest to the clicked point of the curve.

6.9.9 Modify Poles


With this choice, user can modify the pole position. This works in rubber banding mode only (Set
it through Tools->Options->Session->General).
The user selects an existing B-spline curve. The control net is displayed (yellow colour with poles
in red) and the curve is displayed with green colour in the old position. The user is prompted to
specify the pole to move to a new position. Once the pole is selected, the control net (now in
rubber banding mode) moves along with the mouse movement. Click to set the pole to a new
position. The new curve position is displayed in white colour. If satisfied, hit the Enter key to get
modified curve or continue modification of a new pole (of the same curve) to a new position.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 81


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 6-11: Modifying poles of b-spline curve

6.9.10 Remove Knot


With this choice, user can remove knot from a B-spline curve. This works in rubber banding mode
only (Set it through Tools->Options->Session->General). The user selects an existing B-spline
curve. On selecting the curve, the knots markers will come on the exact location (red colour
markers) and the curve is displayed with green colour in the old position. The user is prompted
to specify the knot to remove. On selecting, the knot will remove from the original curve and a
new B-spline curve will form with a different geometry. If satisfied, hit the Enter key to get
modified curve or continue the same to get the desired B-spline curve.

Figure 6-12: Removing knot from B-Spline Curve

6.9.11 Split - At Knots


The user selects an existing b-spline curve. The curve is split at knot positions to obtain b-splines
of same continuity. For example, if the curve has 8 knots, then the curve is split into 7 curves. The
number of b-splines created are displayed at the bottom message panel.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 82


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.9.12 Modify B-Spline Curve (General and Geometry)


A tabbed dialog box would appear, through which the user can modify various parameters
related to the b-spline. The General Tabbed pane displays sequence number, name, colour
(modifiable), visibility, and layer number (modifiable). The Geometric Tabbed pane gives
information on number of control points, knots and global continuity (0 to 6) of the curve.
• 0 - C0: only geometric continuity.
• 1 - G1: for each point on the curve, the tangent vectors "on the right" and "on the left" are
collinear with the same orientation.
• 2 - C1: continuity of the first derivative. The "C1" curve is also "G1" but, in addition, the
tangent vectors " on the right" and "on the left" are equal.
• 3 - G2: for each point on the curve, the normalized normal vectors "on the right" and "on the
left" are equal.
• 4 - C2: continuity of the second derivative.
• 5 - C3: continuity of the third derivative.
• 6 - CN: continuity of the N-th derivative, whatever is the value given for N (infinite order of
continuity).
Along with this there are two more
parameters which use can modify, i.e. reverse
and smoothness (measure of degree).
When reverse is checked(true), it reverses the
orientation of this B-Spline curve. As a result,
following changes take place
• Knots and poles tables are modified,
• The start point of the initial curve
becomes the end point of the reversed
curve,
Figure 6-13: Modifying B-Spline Curve geometry
• The end point of the initial curve
becomes the start point of the reversed curve.
The smoothness option is meant for enhancing the smoothness of curve by increasing the degree
of continuity at knots. For a B-Spline curve of degree d, if a knot Ui has a multiplicity mi, the B-
Spline curve is only Cd-mi continuous at point of parameter Ui. So, if degree (d) is increased, the
elevation of continuity can be achieved. The increment of the degree can be given by moving the
knob of the smoothness slider to a greater value. Once the degree is increased to maximum, it
can't be reduced a lesser value (limitation). The minimum value is the current degree of the curve
(See figure below). So, to regain the original geometric properties of curve undo option is to be
applied. The maximum possible value of the smoothness degree is 25.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 83


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.10 Offset
Set of curves can be created at an offset, that is a specified
distance from a selected (basic) profile or set of curves and has
slope along its length as the basis curves. The basis curve to
offset must lie on a plane, else offset cannot be created properly.
The new offset curve usually can be self-intersecting even
though the basis curve does not self-intersect. The self-
intersecting portions are deleted at the time of construction.
Self-intersection input curves may not give good results. The
direction of offset for curves is determined by the sign of offset
distance and the orientation of the input curves. Give a negative
value to create a offset in the other direction. Profile Offset can
be done directly. Set of curves in chain(continuous) can also be
offsetted. When curves are selected using chain selection/ Figure 6-14: Parameters for curve offset

profile is selected, dialog box will pop up directly without


pressing Enter key after selection of curves. The offset can be created on either side of the basis
curve using the options in the dialog box.
• Specify curve(s) to offset and press Enter: Use the mouse to select existing curve to be
offsetted or select curve entities in chain (CHAIN selection enabled for offset operation). Use
the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve. Hit Enter key to complete one-by-one
selection of curve(s).
A dialog box is prompted to enter the offset distance, one or bi-directional input, number of offset
(By-default number of offsets is 1), capping and cornering. The sign and orientation of basic
curve will determine the direction of offset.

6.10.1 Cornering
Cornering defines the type of join extension required at the joining vertices of the set of curves.
Check cornering option if user require smooth corners (section of arc) at the joining vertices.

Figure 6-15: One directional curve offset with sharp


Figure 6-16: One directional curve offset with smooth cornering cornering

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 84


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

When cornering option is not checked, edges at the joining vertices are extended until they
intersect to form sharp corners. Some offset curves cannot be prolonged or prolonged offset
curves have no intersection.

6.10.2 Capping
Capping is available only with Bi-directional option. Capping option will add a cap (an arc) at the
open ends (non-intersecting portion) of offseted entities. It is used for open set of curves.
Capping is enabled only for set of lines, arcs and elliptical curves.
Error messages:
When offset for a set of curves is not created. An exception message is prompted.
• Remote Exception: Offset is not Done
If a Helix curve is selected which a 3D Curve, offset cannot be created. A warning message is
prompted.
• Warning: To offset a curve, all points on curve must be in the same plane

Figure 6-17: Bi-directional curve offset with Capped Ends Figure 6-18: Bi-directional curve offset without Capped Ends

6.11 Trim
There are different operations to trim or break or divide a curve(s) - line, arc, ellipse, splines,
bezier.
• Single Bound - End(s)
• Double Bound - Trim Ends
• Double Bound - Trim Middle
• Intersection - Manual
• Intersection - Implicit
• Break - At Point(s)
• Break - At Intersection(s)
• Divide

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 85


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Split
• Auto - Split
All curve entities are supported for this operation

6.11.1 Single Bound - End(s)


With this choice, user can trim from one end the curves using another curve as trim boundary.
First user specifies the bound by which the curve is to be trimmed. Then, the side of curve(s) that
is to be retained (saved) is specified. The system prompts with the following messages for the
user.
• Specify first trim boundary curve: Use the mouse to select two curves to be used as a trim
boundary.
• Specify curve(s) on side to save and press Enter: Use the mouse to select multiple existing
curves to be trimmed. Click on the side of curve(s) to be saved. Use the 'Esc' key to reject an
already selected curve. Hit the 'Enter' key once the curve(s) are selected.

6.11.2 Double Bound - Trim Ends


With this choice, user can trim the ends of curve(s) using two boundary curves, i.e. the middle
portion (based on the parametric ends) of the curve(s) is retained (saved). The system prompts
with the following messages for the user
• Specify first trim boundary curve: Use the mouse to select two curves to be used as a trim
boundary.
• Specify second trim boundary curve
• Specify curve(s) to trim and press Enter: Use the mouse to select multiple existing curves to
be trimmed. Use the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve. Hit the 'Enter' key once the
curve(s) are selected

6.11.3 Double Bound - Trim Middle


With this choice, user can trim the middle portion (parametric bounds) of curve(s) between two
boundary curves. The curve(s) ends are retained (saved). For e.g. a line parametric ends are
0.0(start point) to 1.0(end point) and for a full circle it is 0.0 (start) and 2PI i.e. 6.28 (end). The
system prompts with the following messages for the user.
• Specify first trim boundary curve: Use the mouse to select two curves to be used as a trim
boundary.
• Specify second trim boundary curve
• Specify curve(s) to trim at middle and press Enter: Use the mouse to select multiple existing
curves to be trimmed. Use the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve. Hit the 'Enter' key
once the curve(s) are selected

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 86


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.11.4 Intersection - Manual


With this choice, user can manually trim two curves at their intersection. The system prompts
with the following messages for the user.
• Specify first curve on side to save: Use the cursor to specify the first curve on the side of
intersection to save.
• Specify second curve on side to save and press Enter: Use the mouse to specify the second
curve to be trimmed on the side of intersection to save. Use the 'Esc' key to reject an already
selected curve. Hit the 'Enter' key once the curve is selected.
The selected curves are trimmed at their intersection in the indicated quadrant as per the side
to save.

6.11.5 Intersection - Implicit


With this choice, user can automatically trim two curves at their intersection. The system
prompts with the following messages for the user.
• Specify quadrant near the curves: Use the mouse cursor to specify near two curves to be
trimmed and in the quadrant formed by intersection of the two curves.
The selected curves nearest the indication are intersected and curves are retained in the
quadrant.

6.11.6 Break - At Point(s)


With this choice, user can break curve(s) into two parts at a screen point position on the curve.
Existing point lying on curve or implicit points are not selectable. The system prompts with the
following messages for the user.
• Specify curve(s) to break and press Enter: Use the mouse cursor to specify point position on
curves to be broken.
The selected curves are broken with a preset break offset distance (zero mm or inch). The user
can set the break offset anytime by clicking the right mouse button which pops up a dialog box
for entering the break offset distance. This break offset can also be preset in 'Curves' tab of Tools-
>Options->Part dialog.

6.11.7 Break - At Intersection(s)


With this choice, user can break curves into two parts at an intersection with another curve. The
system prompts with the following messages for the user.
• Specify intersection curve: Use the mouse cursor to select a curve.
• Specify curve(s) to break and press Enter: Use the cursor to select curves to be broken.
The selected curves are broken with a preset break offset distance (zero mm or inch). The user
can set the break offset anytime by clicking the right mouse button which pops up a dialog box
for entering the break offset distance. This break offset can also be preset in 'Curves' tab of Tools-
>Options->Part dialog.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 87


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.11.8 Divide
With this choice, user can divide a curve into equal number of parts. The system prompts with
the following messages for the user.
• Specify curve to divide: Use the cursor to select a curve.
• Divisions: Enter number of divisions required in the dialog box.
• Retain Curve: A check box option to "Retain curve" to retain the original curve after division.
Default is disabled

6.11.9 Split
With this option, user can split (break) a set of selected curves at their point of intersection. On
invoking the option, the system would prompt to select the curved to split. Select the curves and
press Enter, the curves would split at their intersection points

6.11.10 Auto - Split


When the user invokes the Auto-split option, then all the curves available in active part are split
i.e. trimmed into individual (new) curves, at all intersecting points of curves. Please note a new
curve entity is created after splitting. Also please check for the overlapping curves and very small
curve segments at the intersection points which may be been created. Supported curves are lines,
arcs, ellipse, bezier, b-spline.

Figure 6-19: Input curves for curves auto-split operation

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 88


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 6-20: Resultant curves after auto-split operation

Error messages:
• If a curve is not trimmed (does not intersect with the boundary curve), the system displays
an error message box and prompts again for curve to be trimmed. Input Error: Curve cannot
be trimmed
• If a curve is not broken, the system displays an error message box and prompts again for
curve(s) to be broken. Input Error: Curves(s) break at position(s) failed
• If the trimming method fails, the system displays an error message box. Remote Exception:
Trimming failed
• If the system fails to get the trimming algorithm from the server, the system prompts the
message on the bottom panel. Failed to get Trim algorithm

6.12 Explore
In curve exploration, user can extract the underlying curves from surface or solid entity. A dialog box
will be displayed for the user to select any one of the following exploration methods.

6.12.1 Explore Fully for Edges


In this method, the user will be prompted to Select solid and surface entities and press
Enter. This method explores all the edges of selected entities and creates the respective curves
(lines/arcs/b-splines etc.). If any unknown curve is found, then internally it is converted to b-
spline curve. User is indicated the number of curves created on successful exploration.

6.12.2 Explore and Replace with Edges


This method is same as 'Explore Fully For Edges' except that it deletes the selected solid and
surface entities after successful exploration.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 89


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

6.12.3 Explore Selected Edges


This method explores particular(selected) edge/edges of any entity and creates the respective
curves (lines/arcs etc). It should be noted that in this method only one entity can be selected
(explored) at a time. User is indicated the number of curves on successful exploration.

6.12.4 Explore Hidden Edges


This method is to explore hidden/visible edges of solid or surface entities in a given view or a
projection. User has filters to explore following types of curves:
• Hidden: Edges that are not visible from a particular view direction.
• Visible: Edges that are visible from a chosen view direction.
These edges can be further categorized into:
• sharp: present a C0 Continuity edges
• smooth: transition edges between two surfaces
• sewn: a double edge where a face in a periodic surface is sewn together
• outlines: edges added to the topology in order to represent the contours visible in a
particular projection
User can choose various combinations of filters to get desired results.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 90


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 7. Surface Modeling

7.1 Introduction
The Surfaces menu in the system supports creation and modification of surface entities ranging
from planes to more complicated geometric entities such as spheres, cylinders, cones, pipes, and
B-Spline surfaces. Easy-to-use interfaces are provided for creation of each of these entities. An
entity can be created (wherever applicable) using any of the following methods
• Using the keyboard by invoking the operation from the Menu Bar: When this method is
invoked a dialog box will appear in which the user can enter various parameters related to
the given entity. When the OK button is pressed after entering the inputs, the dialog box
disappears for a moment and the entity is displayed. The dialog box will then re-appear, and
the user can create another entity or press the Cancel button to terminate the entity creation
process
• Using the mouse button on screen: Use the mouse button on the screen to enter the desired
input for creation and modification of an entity.

7.2 Basic Plane, Ruled, Cylinder, Conical Surface


7.2.1 Basic Plane
With these choices, user can create planes (geometrical) that are finite in length and width. In
the operation, the plane is created either through three non-collinear points or three points with
the center and a corner of the new plane. It has four ways of creation.
• Screen Position
• Key-in
• Screen Position (3 points)
• Key-in (3 points)

7.2.1.1 Screen Position


The system prompts the following messages for the user
• Specify First Point: Use the mouse to indicate first point position on the screen. The three
points should not form a straight line.
• Specify Second Point: Indicate the second point position.
• Specify Third Point: Indicate the third point position.
• Specify Center Point of plane: Indicate the point position for center of the plane.
• Specify Corner Point of plane: Indicate the point position for corner of the plane.

7.2.1.2 Key In
The system prompts with a dialog box for entering the points coordinates to define a plane

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 91


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

7.2.1.3 Screen Position (3 Corner points)


The system prompts the following messages for the user
• Specify first point: Use the mouse to indicate first corner point position on the screen. The
three points should not form a straight line.
• Specify side corner point: Indicate the second corner point position.
• Specify opposite corner point: Indicate the third point position opposite to the first point.

7.2.1.4 Key in (3 Corner points)

The system prompts with a dialog box for entering the points coordinates to define a plane
through three corner points.

Error messages
• If the first three points are collinear, they do not define a plane. The system displays an error
message box: Points are collinear, cannot create a Plane. Specify third point again
• If the points clicked are too close to the previous point, the system displays an error message
box: Point too close first point, cannot create a Plane. Specify second point again
• If a plane is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote Exception: Plane
Entity not created

7.2.2 Ruled
With this choice, user can create a surface by sweeping straight lines from one curve to another
curve. The system prompts the following messages for the user.
• Specify First curve: Use the mouse to select the first curve. The curve can be any single-entity
curve.
• Specify next curve: Select the second curve.
The system creates and displays the ruled surface and prompts again for creation of a new ruled
surface.

Figure 7-1: Ruled Surface from set of curves

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 92


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Error messages:
If a ruled surface is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception: Ruled Surface not created.

7.2.3 Cylinder Surface


With this choice, user can create a right circular cylinder. This surface is a set of points at a
specified distance from a center axis line. The system generates a cylinder when a user specifies
the two end points of the axis and then the radius of the cylinder. It has two ways of creation.
• Screen Position
• Key-in
• Axis Line
• Base Circle

7.2.3.1 Screen position


If the user clicks on screen position menu, the system prompts the following messages for the
user:

• Specify first end point of cylinder: Indicate axis start point position on the screen.
• Specify second end point of cylinder: Indicate the axis end point position
• After the axis is defined, the system prompts with a dialog box for entering the radius of the
cylinder. The default value is 0 mm (inch).
The system defines and displays the cylinder and prompts again for creation of new cylinder

7.2.3.2 Key in
If the user clicks on Key in menu, the system prompts with a dialog for entering the Cylinder end
points X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2 and the Radius of the Cylinder.
• X1 Enter axis start point value X.
• Y1 Enter axis start point value Y.
• Z1 Enter axis start point value Z. The default is 0.
• X2 Enter axis end point value X.
• Y2 Enter axis end point value Y.
• Z2 Enter axis end point value Z. The default is 0.
• Radius Enter the Cylinder radius.

7.2.3.3 Axis Line


To create a Cylindrical Surface using a line and a positive radius. The line is the cylinder axis and
the radius is the cylinder radius. If the user clicks on Axis Line menu, the system prompts the
following messages for the user.
• Select Axis Line

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 93


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Once the axis line is selected, the system prompts with a dialog box for radius of the cylinder.
On entering radius, the system defines and displays a Cylindrical Surface with the axis line
extending from the first end point of the cylinder to the second end point of the cylinder. The
radius must be greater than zero.

7.2.3.4 Base Circle


To create a Cylindrical Surface using an existing circle and a non-zero length. The length is the
cylinder's axis length and the radius of the circle is the radius of the cylinder. If the user clicks on
Base Circle menu, the system prompts the
following messages for the user:
• Select Base Circle
• Once the circle is selected, the system prompts
with a dialog box for length of the cylinder.
On entering the length, the system defines and
displays a Cylindrical Surface whose one end and
the radius is defined by the selected circle and the Figure 7-2: Cylinder creation using base circle
axis from the length. The length must be non-zero.
Modification: With this user can modify the general and geometric parameters of the Cylindrical
Surface.
Error messages:
• If the points clicked are too close to the previous point, the system displays an error message
box: Input Error: Points too close, cannot create a Cylindrical Surface.
• If a cylinder is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote Exception:
Cylindrical surface not created.

7.3 B-Spline, Revolution, Offset and Pipe surface


7.3.1 B-Spline
A B-Spline surface is defined by:
• its degrees, in the u and v parametric directions,
• its periodic characteristic, in the u and v parametric directions,
• a table of poles, also called control points (together with the associated weights if the surface
is rational), and
• a table of knots, together with the associated multiplicities.
In each parametric direction, a B-Spline surface can be:
• uniform or non-uniform,
• rational or non-rational,
• periodic or non-periodic.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 94


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

The poles of the surface are the points used to shape and reshape the surface. They comprise a
rectangular network. There are eight methods to create a B-Spline surface.
• Approximation
• Boundary Curves - Two, Three or Four curves (existing B-Spline curves)
• Skinning
• Lofting
• Extend
• Convert
• Edge to Edge
• Modify Poles & Weights

7.3.1.1 Approximation
With this choice, the user can create a B-Spline surface which approximates the data points. The
system prompts for a dialog box for entering the number of data points per U and V paths (say
'm' in U-path and 'n' in V-path) using a spinner (Increment/decrement using the arrow buttons
or type in a new value in the editable text field). The minimum and maximum value is 2 and 1000
respectively. Next the system prompts for specifying 'm' points for U-Path 'n' times. The last
point clicked can be rejected by hitting the 'Esc' key. After the last point is specified, it creates
and displays the B-Spline surface and prompts for creation of a new B-Spline surface with same
number of points. In order to create with new set of data points, select the B-Spline -
Approximation menu item again.
Error messages:
• The system checks for null points, if null, the system displays an error message box: Input
Error: Too few points.
• If a B-Spline surface is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception: B-Spline surface not created

7.3.1.2 Boundary Curves


With this choice, the user can create a B-Spline surface filled from contiguous curves which forms
its boundaries. The system accepts two, three or four curves as the target boundaries. A range of
filling style - more or less rounded, more or less flat - is also available. The type of filling style
Type to be used is one of the following:
• Stretch - the style with the flattest patch
• Coons - a rounded style of patch with less depth than that of Curved
• Curved - the style with the most rounded patch.
The four curves selected must form a closed loop else system will prompt an error message to
the user. The system prompts with the following messages for the user.
• Specify first curve: Use the mouse to select an existing curve.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 95


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Specify next curve: Select an existing curve which is contiguous with first curve. Hit the
ENTER key to create with two curves.
• Specify next curve: Select an existing curve which is contiguous with second curve. Hit the
ENTER key to create with three curves.
• Specify last curve: Select an existing curve which is contiguous with third curve.
• A dialog box prompts up for selecting filling style. Pull down the combo-box to select one of
choices, "Stretch", "Coons" and "Curved".
The system creates and displays the B-Spline surface and prompts again for creation of a new B-
Spline surface with curves as boundary.
Error messages:
If a B-Spline surface is not created, the system displays an error message box.
Remote Exception: B-Spline surface with 2(3,4) curves not created

7.3.1.3 Skinning
With this choice, the user can generate a surface from one curve/edge to another curve/edge.
The system prompts with the following messages for the user.
• Specify First Curve/Edge: Use the mouse to select and existing curve or edge of surface. Use
the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve/edge.
• Specify Second Curve/Edge: Use the mouse to select another curve or edge of surface. This
creates the surface
Error messages:
• If a B-Spline surface is not created by skinning, the system displays an error message box:
Remote Exception: Failed to create a B-spline surface

7.3.1.4 Lofting
With this choice, the user can generate surface(s) on a cross-section of curves. The user can
specify more than one curve in each cross-section and all the curves in each cross-section should
be continuous. The system generates surfaces equal to number of curves in each cross-section.
Minimum of two sections are required. The system prompts with the following messages for the
user.
• Specify curves for the first section and then press N: Use the mouse to select existing curves
(continuous in each section) and then hit the 'N' key to select curves in next section. Use the
'Esc' key to reject an already selected curve.
• Specify curves for the next section and then press N or Enter: Use the mouse to select existing
curves (continuous in each section) and then hit the 'N' key to select curves in next section
or hit the 'Enter' key to create the surface.
Surface type if ‘Ruled' is set then the surfaces generated between two consecutive sections (set
of curves) are ruled surfaces, or if set to 'Smooth' then they are smoothed out by approximation
to create a single surface passing through all successive curves of the same index of the sections.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 96


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

The first output is a 'smooth' surface generated between three sections containing a single circle.
The second output is 'ruled' surfaces generated between each line (edge) of the consecutive
sections.

Error messages:

If a B-Spline surface is not created by lofting, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception- Failed to create a B-spline surface

Figure 7-3: Surface Lofting with smooth type

7.3.1.5 Extend
With this choice, user can extend an existing bounded (plane, bezier or b-spline) surface beyond
its original bounds. The extension is performed according to a geometric requirement and a
continuity constraint. It should be a small extension with respect to the size of the original
surface. To extend, the system requires a bounded surface, direction and side of extension, length
of extension and degree of continuity. The new surface created is a B-Spline surface.
• Specify Bounded surface: Use the mouse to select an existing bounded surface (plane, bezier
or b-spline).
A dialog box prompts with parameters controlling the extension.
• Degree of continuity: Select 1,2 or 3 from the combo-box list.
• Extension Length: Enter real length value.
• In U parametric Direction: If true (checked), the direction of extension in U- parametric
direction of the surface.
• After last parameter: If true (checked), the extension is built on the last parameter of the
surface.
Error messages:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 97


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Input Error: Select a bounded surface only


• If a B-Spline surface is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception - B-Spline surface not created by extension

7.3.1.6 Convert
With this choice, the user can create an equivalent B-Spline surface converting an existing
surface. The surface to be converted must be finite i.e. parametric bounds is finite. The
orientation of the resulting surface is same as the selected surface. The system prompts with the
following messages for the user.
• Select surfaces to convert and press Enter: Use the mouse to select existing surfaces and then
hit the 'Enter' key. Use the 'Esc' key to reject an already selected surface.
A dialog box pops up to enter the following conversion parameters. In order to build the B-Spline
surface with higher level of continuity it is possible to approximate the surface by controlling the
parameters.
• U Continuity (ucon): Select the required U variable
continuity from the combo box.
• V Continuity (vcon): Select the required V variable
continuity.
• Precision Code

o Select 1 for fast computation & average precision.


o Select 2 for average computation & good precision.
o Select 3 for slow computation & very good precision.
• Max U Deg: Write the maximum degree for U. It should be
>=(2*ucon+1) or it will alert user for an input error.
o 0 when UContinuity is C0
o 1 when UContinuity is C1 Figure 7-4: Setting B-Spline surface
continuity
o 2 when UContinuity is C2
• Max V Deg: Write the maximum degree required for V as per the condition given for U above.
• Max Segments: The default value for maximum segments is set to 16. User can provide as
per the requirements, but the range should be between 5-50 or an input error dialog will
appear.
Error messages:
• If a B-Spline surface is not created by conversion, the system displays an error message box:
Remote Exception - B-Spline surface not created by conversion

7.3.1.7 Edge to Edge


With this choice, the user can generate b-spline surface between one surface edge to another
edge respecting the edge tangencies condition. The user can select an edge of existing surface or

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 98


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

trimmed surface entity by clicking near surface boundary. The system prompts with the
following messages for the user.
• Select surface edge: Use the mouse to select edges of surface or trimmed surface. Use the
'Esc' key to reject an already selected edge.
If user want to create b-spline surface using edge to edge operation from other surfaces like, fillet,
chamfer, offset, trimmed, revolution, extrude and freeform surfaces. For this user can select any
two surfaces, then select the edge of first surface and then select edge of second surface. For
example, output selecting 'edges' from two 'parallel' surfaces.

Figure 7-5: B-Spline surface created using edge to edge option

7.3.1.8 Modify Poles and Weights


With this choice, user can modify the coordinate of pole. This works in rubber banding mode only
(Enable it using Tools->Options-Session). The user selects an
existing B-spline surface. The control point polygon is displayed
(yellow colour with poles in red) and the surface is displayed with
white colour in the old position.
The user is prompted to specify a pole to be modified. Once the
pole is selected, a dialog box prompts with following parameters
• Index - Show the specified pole index (UIndex, VIndex)
• Pole.X - Enter X coordinate of pole
• Pole.Y - Enter Y coordinate of pole
• Pole.Z - Enter Z coordinate of pole
• Weight - Enter pole Weight Figure 7-6: Parameters for
modifying B-Spline Surface
The surface is modified and displayed based on the parameters.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 99


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 7-7: Parameters of B-Spline Surface

7.3.2 Revolution
With this choice, the user can create a multiple surface of revolution (revolved surface). Such
surfaces are obtained by rotating a set of curves/a profile through a partial or complete
revolution about an axis (referred to as the "axis of revolution"). The curves/profile and the axis
must be in the same plane (the "reference plane" of the surface).
Rotation around the axis of revolution in the trigonometric sense defines the ‘u’ parametric
direction. So, the ‘u’ parameter is an angle, and its origin is given by the position of the meridian
on the surface. The user is prompted to enter the start and end angle of revolution. The system
prompts the following messages for the user.
• Select the axis of revolution: Select the line to be used as the axis of revolution
• Specify Curves and hit Enter: Use the mouse to select the curves/ profile which are to be
rotated about a line/axis to define the surface.
• Revolution angle parameters: Enter the start and end angle of revolution in degrees.

Figure 7-8: Revolved Surface using set of curves

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 100


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

The system creates and displays the surface of revolution and prompts again for creation of a
new set of surfaces. In the figure, a revolved surface is created taking vertical line as an axis of
rotation and closed set of curves that are rotated around the line entity.
Error messages:
The curve is not checked for planarity. It is not checked to verify that the axis of revolution is in
its plane. It is not checked for self-intersections.
If the entity selected is not a line, the system displays an error message box: Input Error- Select
a line only, select again

If a surface of revolution is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception - Revolution of surface not created

7.3.2.1 Surface of Revolution Modification:


With this choice, the user can modify the general and revolution angle parameter of the surface.

7.3.3 Offset
An offset surface is defined by,
• the basis surface to which it is parallel, and
• the distance (constant and variable) between the offset surface and its basis surface.
A point on the offset surface is built by measuring the offset value along the normal vector at a
point on the basis surface. The side of the basis surface on which the offset is measured depends
on the sign of the offset value. An offset surface can be self-intersecting, even if the basis surface
does not self-intersect. The self-intersecting portions are not deleted at the time of construction.

7.3.3.1 Offset – Constant


With this choice, user can create a surface that is normally offset from a selected (base) surface.
The offset surface is on the side of the positive unit normal vector to the base surface. If the
system creates the offset surface on the wrong side of the base surface, delete the offset surface
and re-create it with a negative offset distance.
Self-intersections are not removed at the time of construction. Offset cannot be created if the
selected base surface is not at least 'C1' continuous. Alternatively convert (See menu item:
Surfaces -- B-Spline -- Convert) the surface to C0 b-spline surface to create an offset surface. The
system prompts the following messages for the user.
• Specify a surface: Use the mouse to select a base surface.
• After selection, the selected surface is displayed in white colour and Arrow marker shows
the direction of offset (at corner points). Also, a dialog box prompts for entering the offset
distance.
• Offset distance. Enter the normal distance between the base surface and the offset surface.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 101


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 7-9: Surface selected for constant value offset

7.3.3.2 Offset – Variable


With this choice, user can create a b-spline surface whose offset value is set at each corner point
of a selected basis (base) surface. This operation will work explicitly for the surface having one
side open (either open at U or V direction)
Limitations:
• Not applicable to spherical and toroidal surface (as closed in both U and V parametric
direction)
• Not applicable to sewed surfaces i.e. freeform, evolved, filleted, chamfered surfaces
After selection, the selected surface is displayed in white colour and Arrow marker shows the
direction of offset (at corner points). Also, a dialog box prompts for entering the offset distance.

The various input parameters for variable offset surface creation are,
• Reference point options (1(u=0, v=0), 2(u=1, v=0), 3(u=0, v=1), 4(u=1, v=1)) for offset. Any
geometry surface patch has U and V parametric space.
• Number of points along U parametric direction.
• Number of points along V parametric direction.
• Offset Value at Reference point (preferred at u=0 and v=0).
• Offset value at end of U parametric direction.
• Offset value at end of V parametric direction.
The system creates and displays the offset surface and prompts again for creation of a new offset
surface.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 102


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 7-10: Surface selected for variable value offset

Warning:
The offset surface is built with a copy of the base surface. Therefore, when base surface is
modified the offset surface is not modified.
Error messages:
• If the selected entity is not a surface or a pipe and revolution surface, the system displays an
error message box: Input Error- Not a valid surface, select any surface other than pipe and
revolution surface, specify again.
• If an offset surface is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote
Exception- Offset Surface not created.

7.3.4 Pipe Surface


A pipe surface is built by sweeping (driving) a curve (the section) along another curve (the path).
The following types of creation are available:
• pipes with a circular section of constant radius,
• pipes with a constant section,
• pipes with a section evolving between two given curves.
The parametrization of the resultant surface is: U-direction along the section and V-direction
along the path curve.

7.3.4.1 Constant circular section


With this choice, the user can create multiple pipe (surface patches) with constant circular
section of constant radius along multiple path curves. If more than one curve is selected for path,
individual pipe surface patches are created. In this case of a pipe with a constant circular section,
the section is a circle of radius centered on the origin of path curve(s) and whose "Z Axis" is

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 103


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

aligned along the vector tangential to the origin of path curve(s). The system prompts the
following messages for the user.
• Specify path curve: Use the mouse to select existing CADCurve(s) (full hyperbola not
supported) that is to have the section driven along it.
• A dialog box prompts for entering the radius of circle (section curve): Enter Pipe Radius -
Enter the radius of the constant circular section.
The system creates and displays the pipe surface(s) and prompts again for creation of a new
surface.

Figure 7-11: Pipe with constant circular section

Error messages:
• If a full hyperbola curve (created with start angle - 0 degrees and end angle - 360 degrees),
is selected as path curve, the system displays an error message box: Input Error - Full
Hyperbola not supported
• If a pipe surface of constant section is not created due to remote exception, the system
displays an error message box: Remote Exception - Cannot create Pipe surface

7.3.4.2 Constant section


With this choice, the user can create a pipe(swept) surface patches with constant section along
an existing path curve. The system prompts the following messages for the user.
• Specify path curve: Use the mouse to select an existing curve that is to have the section
curve(s) to be swept along it.
• Specify Section curve(s) and press Enter: Select the section curve(s) that is to be swept along
the path curve. Chain selection is also supported using RMB option.
The system creates and displays the pipe surface patch(es) and prompts again for creation of a
new surface.
Error messages:
• If a full hyperbola curve (created with start angle - 0 degrees and end angle - 360 degrees),
is selected as path curve, the system displays an error message box: Input Error - Full
Hyperbola not supported.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 104


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• If a pipe surface with constant section is not created, the system displays an error message
box: Remote Exception - Pipe surface not created.

Figure 7-12: Constant section pipe surface

7.3.4.3 Varying (evolving) section


With this choice, the user can create a pipe with varying section i.e. varying from one section
curve to another section curve along an existing path curve. The system prompts the following
messages for the user.

Figure 7-13: Varying section pipe surface

• Specify path curve: Use the mouse to select an existing curve that is to have the section driven
along it.
• Specify First section curve: Select the first section curve that is to be driven along the path
curve.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 105


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Specify Second section curve: Select the second section curve till where the first curve is
driven.
The system creates and displays the pipe surface and prompts again for creation of a new surface.

Error messages:
• If a full hyperbola curve (created with start angle - 0 degrees and end angle - 360 degrees),
is selected as path curve, the system displays an error message box: Input Error-Full
Hyperbola not supported.
• If a pipe surface with varying section is not created, the system displays an error message
box: Remote Exception -Pipe surface not created.

7.4 Fillet, Chamfer


7.4.1 Fillet
Using this operation, user can create fillet surface(s)
with constant and variable radius (linearly varying
from start-to-end of common edge) between the
surfaces having common edge(s). The surfaces
between which the fillet(s) is to be created must have
common meeting (contiguous) edge to build the
fillet(s). Fillet(s) will be built along the common
edge(s) of the selected surfaces. If surfaces have
common meeting corner, for example three surfaces Figure 7-14: Edge Fillet - Constant radius
meeting at the corner, like a box corner, in that case
corner fillet (i.e. spherical shape) will be generated.
Multiple surfaces can be selected for filleting, the
system computes and builds multiple fillets along the
common edges and common corners. When user
select the fillet operation, system prompts user to
select the surfaces.
• Select surfaces and press Enter
• After selecting the surfaces, a dialog will pop up
for user to provide the fillet radius (radii for Figure 7-15: Corner Fillet - Constant Radius
variable fillet). Once user enters the radius value,
system computes fillet(s) and build them.
Error messages:
• If fillet surface is not created, the system displays
an error message box: Fillet/Chamfer not created

7.4.1.1 Modify
User can modify the radius of already created fillet.
Figure 7-16: Edge Fillet - Variable Radius

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 106


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

7.4.2 Chamfer
Using this operation, user can create chamfer surface(s) between the surfaces having common
edge(s). The surfaces between which the chamfer(s) is to be created must have common meeting
edge to build the chamfer(s). Chamfer(s) will be built along the common edge(s) of the selected
surfaces. If surfaces have common meeting corner, for example three surfaces meeting at the
corner, like a box corner, in that case corner chamfer will be generated. Multiple surfaces can be
selected for chamfering, the system computes and builds multiple chamfers along the common
edges and common corners. When user select the chamfer operation, system prompts user to
select the surfaces.
• Select surfaces and press Enter
• After selecting the surfaces, a dialog will pop up for user to provide the chamfer parameters.
If user selects only two surfaces, then enter the values for "Distance 1" and "Distance 2".
"Distance 1" is the chamfer distance on the first selected surface from the common edge and
"Distance 2" is the chamfer distance on the second surface from the common edge. In case if
user selects multiple surfaces (more than two), in that case user need to enter only one
"Distance" value. Once user enters the appropriate value(s) for chamfer parameter(s),
system computes the chamfer(s) and build them.
Error messages:
• If chamfer surface is not created, the system displays an error message box: Fillet/ Chamfer
not created.

Figure 7-17: Edge Chamfer Figure 7-18: Multiple Chamfer

7.4.2.1 Modify
User can modify the distance parameter(s) of already created chamfer.

7.5 Explore
In surface exploration, user can extract the underlying
surface (mapped to Freeform surface instance) from
solid entity. A dialog box will be displayed for the user
to select any one of the following exploration methods.
Select any of the three options as per the requirement.
Figure 7-19: Surface Explore options

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 107


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

7.5.1 Explore Fully for Surfaces


In this method, the user will be prompted to select solid entities and press 'Enter' key. This
method explores all the faces of selected solid's and creates a freeform surface entity. The Model
tree indicates the number of freeform surfaces created on successful exploration.

7.5.2 Explore and Replace with Surface


This method is same as 'Explore Fully For surfaces' except that it deletes the selected solid
entities after successful exploration.

7.5.3 Explore Selected Faces


This method explores selected face/faces of an entity and creates the respective freeform
surface. In this method only one entity can be selected (explored) at a time. Number of surfaces
explored successfully is indicated to the user at the message panel.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 108


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 8. Solid Modeling

8.1 Introduction
With CollabCAD user can create the primitive solids box, cone, cylinder, sphere, torus, slab,
freeform, revolution solid and sweep solid. There are two types of methods available to create
the solid primitive box, cone, cylinder, sphere and torus.
• Key in method (Enter values): When this method is invoked a dialog box will appear in which
the user can enter various parameters related to the given entity. When the OK button is
pressed after entering the inputs, the dialog box disappears for a moment and the entity is
displayed. The dialog box will then re-appear, and the user can create another entity or press
the Cancel button to terminate the entity creation process.
• Using screen position: When this method is invoked CollabCAD will prompt the user to click
the parameters related to the given entity.

8.2 Box, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Torus, Coil


8.2.1 Solid Box
With this choice, user can create a Solid Box. To create Solid Box, go to Solids menu then to Box.
It has two ways of creation.
• Screen Position
• Key-in
• 3 Edge Lines

8.2.1.1 Screen Position


If the user clicks on screen position menu, the system prompts the following messages:
• Specify one corner of the box: Use the mouse to indicate a point position on the screen.
• Specify opposite corner of the box: Indicate the opposite point for the Solid Box.
Once the corners of the box are specified, the system prompts with a dialog box for entering the
thickness of the Solid Box. Enter the desired thickness.
The system defines and displays the Solid Box and prompts again for creation of new Solid Box.

8.2.1.2 Key in
If the user clicks on Key in menu, the system prompts with a dialog for entering the Solid Box
corner X, Y, Z, Length @X, Length @Y and Length @Z
• Corner X: Enter one corner value of X.
• Corner y: Enter one corner value of Y.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 109


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Corner z: Enter one corner value of Z.


• Corner @X: Enter the length value along X.
• Corner @y: Enter the length value along Y.
• Corner @z: Enter the length value along Z.

The system defines and displays the Solid Box and prompts again
for creation of new Solid Box.

8.2.1.3 Three Edge lines


Creation of a Solid Box from Three mutually perpendicular lines
meeting at a common end point. If the user clicks on Three Edge Figure 8-1: Key in parameters for
Lines menu, the system prompts the following messages: Solid Box creation

• Select First Edge Line: Select first edge line on the screen.
• Select Second Edge line: Select second edge line on the screen.
• Select Third Edge line: Select third edge line on the screen.
Once the edge lines are selected, the system defines and displays a Solid Box taking common end
point as the corner and three lines as three edges of the box.
In case lines are not perpendicular or don’t have common end point, system will prompt proper
error message.

8.2.1.4 Modify
Modification of Solid Box is possible. With this user can modify the general and geometric
properties of the Solid Box.
Error messages:
• If a Solid Box is not created, the system displays an error message: Remote Exception or
Construction Error- Solid Box not created.

8.2.2 Solid Cylinder


With this choice, user can create a Solid Cylinder. The system generates a Solid Cylinder when a
user specifies the two end points of the axis and then the end radius of the Cylinder. To create
Solid Cylinder, go to Solids menu then to Cylinder. It has different ways of creation.
• End Points, Radius
• Key-in
• Axis Line
• Base Circle

8.2.2.1 End Points, Radius


If the user clicks on "End Points, Radius" menu, the system prompts the following messages.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 110


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Specify first end point of the Cylinder: Indicate axis start point position on the screen.
• Specify second end point of Cylinder: Indicate the axis end point position.
• Once the axis is defined, the system prompts with a dialog box for entering the radius of the
Cylinder.
The system defines and displays the Cylinder and prompts again for creation of new Cylinder.
Enter the desired radius.

8.2.2.2 Key in
If the user clicks on Key in menu, the system
prompts with a dialog for entering the Cylinder
end points X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2 and the Radius of
the Cylinder.
• X1: Enter axis start point value X.
• Y1: Enter axis start point value Y.
• Z1: Enter axis start point value Z.
• X2: Enter axis end point value X.
• Y2: Enter axis end point value Y.
• Z2: Enter axis end point value Z.
• Radius: Enter the Cylinder radius.
8.2.2.3 Axis Line Figure 8-2: Key in parameters for Solid
Cylinder creation
To create a Solid Cylinder using a line and a positive radius. The line is the cylinder axis and the
radius is the cylinder radius. If the user clicks on Axis Line menu, the system prompts the
following message:
• Select Axis Line
• Once the axis line is selected, the system prompts with a dialog box for radius of the cylinder.

Figure 8-3: Cylinder creation using line as axis

In the figure Line entity is considered as axis of the cylinder, with length of Line as height of
cylinder. On entering radius, the system defines and displays a Solid Cylinder with the axis line

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 111


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

extending from the first end point of the cylinder to the second end point of the cylinder. The
radius must be greater than zero.

8.2.2.4 Base Circle


To create a Solid Cylinder using an existing circle and a non-zero length. The length is the
cylinder's axis length and the radius of the circle is the radius of the cylinder. If the user clicks on
Base Circle menu, the system prompts the following message:
• Select Base Circle
• Once the circle is selected, the system prompts with a dialog box for length of the cylinder.
On entering the length, the system defines and displays a Solid Cylinder whose one end and the
radius is defined by the selected circle and the axis from the length. The length must be non-zero.
Error messages:
• If the points clicked are too close to the previous point, the system displays an error message.
Input Error - Points too close, cannot create a Cylinder.
• Radius should be > 0.
• If a Solid Cylinder is not created, the system displays an error message: Remote Exception
or Creation or modification Error
• Exception failed to Solid Cylinder

8.2.2.5 Modify
Modification of Solid Cylinder is possible. With this user can modify the general and geometric
properties of the Solid Cylinder.

8.2.3 Solid Cone


With this choice, user can create a Solid Cone. The system generates the Solid Cone when a user
specifies the two end points to define the axis and then the end radii of the cone. To create Solid
Cone, go to Solids menu then to Cone. It has two ways of creation.
• End Points, Radii
• Key-in
• Axis Line
• Base Circle

8.2.3.1 End Points, Radii


If the user clicks on screen position menu, the system prompts the following messages:
• Specify first end point of the cone: Indicate axis start point position on the screen.
• Specify second end point of cone: Indicate the axis end point position.
• Once the axis is defined, the system prompts with a dialog box for entering the radius
(Radius1 / Radius2) of the cone at the two end points. Enter the desired radii.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 112


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

The system defines and displays the cone and prompts again for creation of new cone.

8.2.3.2 Key in
If the user clicks on key in menu, the system prompts with a dialog for entering the cone end
points X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2 and the radius
(Radius1/Raidus2) of the cone at the two end points.
• X1: Enter axis start point value X.
• Y1: Enter axis start point value Y.
• Z1: Enter axis start point value Z.
• X2: Enter axis end point value X.
• Y2: Enter axis end point value Y.
• Z2: Enter axis end point value Z.
• Radius1: Enter the cone end radius.
• Radius2: Enter the cone end radius.
8.2.3.3 Axis Line
To create a Solid Cone from a line and two positive Figure 8-4: Key in parameters for Solid Cone creation
radii value. The two radii are the base radius and
the top radius respectively. If the user clicks on axis line menu, the system prompts the following
message
• Select Axis Line Near the Base Point.
• Once the axis line is selected, the system prompts with a dialog box for base radius and top
radius of the cone.
On entering the radii, the system defines and displays a Solid Cone with the axis line extending
from the first end point of the cone to the second end point of the cone. The radii must be different
and must be greater than zero.

8.2.3.4 Base Circle

To create a Solid Cone from an existing circle, a positive radius and a non-zero length value. The
radius is the top radius of the cone and the length value is the length of the axis of the cone. If the
user clicks on Base Circle menu, the system prompts the following message.

• Select Base Circle


• Once the circle is selected, the system prompts with a dialog box for length and top radius of
the cone.
On entering the length and radius, the system defines and displays a Solid Cone whose one end
is defined by the circle, the axis is from the length and the top radius is at the opposite end of the
cone from the selected circle. The length must be non-zero.
Error messages:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 113


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• If the points clicked are too close to the previous point, the system displays an error message:
Input Error - Points too close, cannot create a Cone.
• If the end radii are same, the system displays an error message: Input Error - Cone ends must
have different radii.
• Both radii cannot be 0.
• If a conical solid is not created, the system displays an error message: Remote Exception -
Construction/modification Error
• Remote Exception-failed to create Solid Cone.

8.2.3.5 Modify
Modification of Solid Cone is possible. With this user can modify the general and geometric
properties of the Solid Cone.

8.2.4 Solid Sphere


With this choice, user can create a Solid Sphere. The solid is the set of points distance from a
center point. To create Solid Sphere, go to Solids menu then to Sphere. It has two ways of creation.
• Screen Position
• Key-in
• Great Circle
• Diameter Line

8.2.4.1 Screen Position


If the user clicks on screen position menu, the system prompts the following messages:
• Specify Sphere Center of the sphere: Use the mouse to indicate center point position on the
screen.
• Specify surface point on the Sphere: Indicate the point position lying on the solid.
The system creates Solid Sphere and
displays the Solid Sphere and prompts
again for creation of a new sphere.

8.2.4.2 Key in
If the user clicks on Key in menu, the
system prompts with a dialog for entering
the Sphere center point X, Y, Z and the
Radius of the sphere.
• Center X: Enter center point value X.
• Center Y: Enter center point value Y.
• Center Z: Enter center point value Z.
Figure 8-5: Key in parameters for Solid Sphere creation
• Radius: Enter the sphere radius.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 114


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.2.4.3 Great Circle


To create a Solid Sphere using an existing circle, the center of the circle is the center of the sphere.
If the user clicks on Great Circle menu, the system prompts the following message:
• Select Great Circle
Once the circle is selected, the system defines and displays a Solid Sphere whose center point and
radius are the center point and radius of the selected circle respectively.

8.2.4.4 Diameter line


To create a Solid Sphere using a line, the length of the line is the diameter of the sphere. If the
user clicks on Diameter Line menu, the system prompts the following message.
• Select Diameter line
Once the line is selected, the system defines and displays a Solid Sphere taking center as the
midpoint of the line and radius as one half of the line's length.
Error messages:
• If the center point and the solid point clicked are too close, the system displays an error
message: Input Error - Points too close, cannot create a Sphere.
• If a Solid Sphere is not created, the system displays an error message: Remote Exception -
Construction Error
• Remote Exception-failed to create Solid Sphere

8.2.4.5 Modify
Modification of Solid Sphere is possible. With this user can modify the general and geometric
properties of the Solid Sphere.

8.2.5 Solid torus


With this choice, user can create a torus. This doughnut-shaped solid is generated by revolving a
circle about a line. To create Solid Torus, go to Solids menu then to Torus. It has two ways of
creation.
• Screen Position
• Key-in
• Great Circle
• Diameter Line

8.2.5.1 Screen position


If the user clicks on screen position menu, the system prompts the following messages:
• Specify center of the torus: Use the mouse to indicate torus center point position on the
screen.
• Specify Point for Torus radius: Indicate the point position to specify the inner radius

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 115


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Specify Point for cross section radius: Indicate the point position to specify the outer radius
The difference between cross-section outer radius and torus radius point gives the cross-section
diameter. The system creates and displays the Solid Torus and prompts again for creation of a
new Solid Torus.

8.2.5.2 Key in
If user clicks on Key in menu, the system prompts with a dialog for entering the Torus center
points X, Y, Z, Torus radius and the Cross section (C.S) radius. of the Cylinder.
• View: Specify the view of creation. Default is Front view.
• X: Enter center point value X.
• Y: Enter center point value Y.
• Z: Enter center point value Z. The default is 0.
• Torus Radius: Specify the Torus radius.
• C.S Radius: Specify the cross-section radius.

Figure 8-6: Key in parameters for Solid Torus

8.2.5.3 Great Circle


To create a Solid Torus using an existing circle and positive radius value. The radius is the section
radius of the torus and the circle radius is the torus radius. If the user clicks on Great Circle menu,
the system prompts the following message.
• Select Great Circle
• Once the circle is selected, the system prompts with a dialog box for section radius.
On entering section radius, the system defines and displays a Solid Torus taking center and
radius as the center and radius of the great circle respectively.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 116


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.2.5.4 Diameter Line


To create a Solid Torus using a line and a positive radius value. The radius is the section radius
and the length of the line is the torus diameter. If the user clicks on Diameter Line menu, the
system prompts the following messages.
• Select Diameter line
• Once the line is selected, the system prompts with a dialog box for section radius.
On entering section radius, the system defines and display a Solid Torus taking center as the
midpoint of the diameter line and torus diameter as the length of the diameter line.
Error messages:
• If the points clicked are too close to the previous point, the system displays an error message
box: Input Error - Point too close, Re specify the point.
• If a torus is not created, the system displays an error message box: Remote Exception -
Construction/Modification Error
• Solid Torus not created

8.2.5.5 Modify
Modification of Solid Torus is possible. With this user can modify the general and geometric
properties of the Solid Torus.

8.2.6 Solid Coil

User can directly create various types of solid coil geometry (like springs) by defining well
defined input parameters governing the trajectory path and the circular cross-section radius.
Based on the input parameters, the trajectory path can be cylindrical (constant - pure helical),
conical (varying - pure spiral) and combination of helical & spiral path. The defining parameters
for each case are:

8.2.6.1 Cylindrical (Constant) Coil


• Coil's axis of revolution (direction) is defined by start and end points. Also reversing the axis
of the coil path will reverse the orientation of the direction of coil i.e. clockwise to
anticlockwise and vice-versa.
• No. of elements to define height(s) and no. of turns for respective height.
• Coil radius - constant value for cylindrical trajectory.
• Radius of circular cross-section which lies on the plane passing through the coil axis
• Array of heights (h1, h2 ...) defining segments of the total height of coil
• Array of No. of turns (n1, n2 ...) defining per height's (h1, h2 ...)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 117


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-7: Creation of cylindrical coil

8.2.6.2 Conical (Varying) Coil


• Coil Axis of revolution(direction) is defined by start and end points. Also reversing the axis
of the coil path will reverse the orientation of the direction of coil i.e. clockwise to
anticlockwise and vice-versa.
• No. of elements to define height(s) and no. of turns for respective height.
• Coil radius @ Start Point - radius at start point of conical trajectory.
• Coil radius @ End Point - radius at end point of conical trajectory.
• Array of heights (h1, h2...) defining break segments of the total height of coil
• Array of No. of turns (n1, n2...) defining per height's (h1, h2...)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 118


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-8: Creation of Conical coil

8.2.6.3 Combination Coil


• Coil Axis of revolution (direction) is defined by start and end points. Also reversing the axis
of the coil path will reverse the orientation of the direction of coil i.e. clockwise to
anticlockwise and vice-versa.
• No. of elements to define radii, height(s) and no. of turns for respective height.
• Array of Coil radii (r1, r2...) for corresponding height.
• Radius of circular Cross-section which lies on the plane passing through the Coil axis
• Array of heights (h1, h2...) defining segments of the total height of coil
• Array of No. of turns (n1, n2...) defining for corresponding height (h1, h2...)
Once a coil solid is created, the definition parameters can be modified to re-define the created
solid coil geometry.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 119


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-9: Creation of Combination Coil

8.3 Slab
A Slab (also called as Prism/Extrusion/Pad) is a solid primitive obtained by extruding the area
bounded by a planar closed contour(s) along the direction normal to the plane of the contour(s)
by a specified distance. This distance is called the slab thickness or height of the slab, and it can
be on either or both sides of the contour(s). The slab can be a simple slab bounded by one closed
contour or it can be a slab with multiple islands in it. In case of slab with multiple islands, one
bounding planar closed contour for slab can circumvent multiple closed contours within its
boundaries, thus resulting in slab with multiple hollow spaces in it. All the contours for the slab
must be co-planar and should not intersect with other contour curves or should not self-
intersect. For slab contour user can select any type of curve except Helix and Spiral curves. The
side or lateral faces formed by the slab can be at an angle (called the draft angle) with the plane
normal. To create Slab, go to Solids menu and then select the "Slab" menu item. System prompts
the following message:
• Select Cross-Section Curves for Slab and Press Enter: Select the curves or profile(s) for the
cross section(s) of slab. Select all the curve(s) or profiles for islands if any. The order of
selection really doesn't matter. Once user finishes the selection of curves or profile(s) for
slab press 'Enter' key.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 120


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Once user selected the cross-section(s) for slab (by pressing "Enter" key), an input dialog
will pop-up requesting user to specify the following slab parameters. Arrows would be
displayed on the selected curves, indicating the normal direction.
• Slab Type (Specify the type of Slab required. Users have 3 choices here)
o One Direction: Extrudes along the displayed direction alone. Draft can be applied to
side faces if needed.
o Two Direction: Extrudes along both sides of selected curves. Draft cannot be applied
to the side faces.
o Upto Point: Extrudes up to a specified Point. Users would be prompted to specify this
point when OK is pressed. Draft can be specified, if required. Direction of normal
would NOT be displayed.
• Thickness 1: Enter the thickness to be applied along the direction of the displayed normal. If
a negative value is entered, it would be applied in the opposite direction.
• Thickness 2: Enter the thickness to be applied in the OPPOSITE direction of the displayed
normal. If a negative value is entered, it would be applied in the direction of the displayed
normal.
• Draft Angle: Enter the draft angle, the angle between the normal to the selected curves and
the side faces. A converging slab would be formed if the signs of Thickness and Draft Angle
are the same. Else the Slab would be diverging. Draft is possible only when Thickness is
applied in one direction alone, and the section curves consists of Lines, Arcs and Profile only.
• Reverse Direction: Click this option to reverse the direction of the displayed normal.
"Thickness 1” would be applied along the direction of the normal, and "Thickness 2" in the
opposite direction.

On pressing the OK button, the Solid Slab will be created and displayed in case of "One Direction"
and "Two Direction" Slabs. For creating slabs "Upto Point", the user would be prompted to
specify the point. On specifying the point, the slab would be created and displayed. The point
shall not be in the plane of the selected curves.
If the selected curves are overlapping, intersecting with other curve(s) or self-intersecting, not
closed or not co-planar an appropriate error message would be displayed.
Firstly, it checks for overlapping set of curves. When curves are overlapping an error message
"Selected curves are overlapping" is displayed and red coloured sphere markers are displayed
on the end points of each overlapped edge. Then, it checks for open ends in the set of curves. If
curves have open ends, an error message "Selected curves have open ends " is displayed and red
coloured sphere markers are displayed at open ends. After that it checks for intersecting and self-
intersecting curves, giving an error message "Selected curves are Intersecting" and red coloured
sphere markers are displayed at the intersection points and for not closed set of curves
(continuous) it gives an error message "Selected curves are not closed". If arrow markers are
displayed at the curve end points signifying the extrusion direction, then the selected curves are
co-planar and suitable for extrusion.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 121


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-10: Slab creation with islands

8.3.1 Modify
If user selects the solid slab for modification and press 'Enter' key a modify dialog will pop-up, at
the bottom-left corner of the window. User can modify the thickness of the slab, draft angle by
entering the desired values into respective text fields. User can also modify the solid slab by
modifying the underlying slab curves/profiles by selecting 'Modify Slab Curves' check box in the
modify dialog. If user selects the 'Modify Slab Curves' check box, all entities on the canvas will
temporarily disappear and the underlying curves/profiles of the solid slab under modification
will be displayed along with the constraints (if they are constrained). While modify dialog is still
on (on the bottom-left corner), user can now select the displayed curves/profiles on the canvas
for modification. When user selects a curve or profile for modification, the corresponding modify
dialog for the selected curve/profile will pop-up at the bottom-right corner of the window. Enter
desired values to modify the selected curve/profile and press 'Ok' button, then the modified
curve/profile will be displayed. User can repeat this to modify other curves/ profile of the slab.
Once user finished modification of the slab curves, now press 'Ok' button on the slab modification
dialog (i.e. at bottom-left corner). The slab with modified values and modified curves will be
computed and displayed. In case after modification of slab curves, user changed his mind and
decided not to change the slab, he can de-select the 'Modify Slab Curves' check box, or press
'Cancel' button, this will roll-back the modifications done to the underlying slab curves.

Figure 8-11: Modifying underline curves of the slab

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 122


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-12: Modified Slab by modifying underline curves

8.4 Revolution
This is a solid primitive obtained by sweeping the area bounded by a planar closed cross-section
contour up to 360 degrees about an axis. The axis must be in the same plane as the contour. To
create a revolution solid, first the user selects the axis of revolution. By default, users can select
lines and straight edges of solids and profiles as the axis. Users can also specify the axis by
specifying its end points. Towards this, press the right mouse button, and choose the option
"Specify Axis Points", and the system would prompt to specify the start and end points of the axis.
After specifying the axis, the system would prompt to select the cross-section curves. Once the
curves are selected, the user presses the Enter button, and a dialog box will pop up for rotation
angle. Enter the starting angle, ending angle and the option for clockwise direction, and after
selecting the OK button, the revolution solid will be displayed.
If the selected curves are not closed, then an error message will be displayed at bottom panel.

Figure 8-13: Revolved Solid

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 123


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.5 Sweep
With this choice, user can create Sweep Solid. To create Sweep Solid, go to Solids menu then to
Sweep. There are two types of Sweep:
• Single Section
• Multiple Sections

8.5.1 Single Section


The solid primitive is created by sweeping a profile along a path. The profile can be any closed
topology and the path is usually a curve or a wire.

Figure 8-14: Sweeps - Single Section

To create a sweep solid, first the user selects the sweep path curve, and closed curves. After the
completion of selection user presses the Enter button, then sweep solid will be displayed. If the
selected curves are not closed, then an error message will be displayed.

8.5.2 Multiple Sections


In this user can select any number of path curves and any number of Profiles. System prompts
the following messages:
• Specify Curves for Sweep path and press N
• Specify Curves for each cross section and press N or Enter
The user has to press N to select next set of cross section curves, otherwise press Enter. While
selecting the curves, the user has to follow the following restrictions.
• Path Curves must be continuous
• Profile must touch the path curve
• The curves in each profile must be closed

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 124


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

In some cases, even after satisfying the above parameters, it may create a shell and not Solid and
the concerned messages will be displayed to the user.

Figure 8-15: Sweeps - Multiple Sections

8.6 Loft
With this choice, user can create Loft Solid. To create Loft Solid, go to Solids menu then to Loft.
There are two types of Loft:
• Curves
• Curves and Points

8.6.1 Curves
Loft Solid is a solid entity passing through a set of curves in multiple cross-section (wire).
To create a solid loft, first the user has to select the curve(s) in closed section and then another
set of curves in section and so on in a particular sequence. The 'N' key has to be pressed to select
curves in next cross-section. After selection, user has to press the Enter button, then solid loft
will be created. The resulting solid entity is built by constructing faces between curves (edges)
of the same index on two consecutive cross-sections (wires). Minimum of two cross-section of
curves are required to build a solid loft. If the selected curves in a cross-section are not closed,
then an error message will be displayed.
If 'Solid Type' is 'Ruled', then the faces generated between two consecutive sections (set of
curves) are ruled surfaces, or if set to 'Smooth' then a smooth surface is created out by
approximation passing through all successive curves of the same index of the cross-sections. In
the figure the first output is a 'ruled' type solid generated between four sections(circle's). Second
output is using the same section's with 'smooth' type.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 125


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-16: Solid loft with ruled and smooth option

8.6.2 Curves and Points


To create a solid loft, first the user has to specify the (start) point and then select the curve(s) in
closed section in a particular sequence. The 'N' key has to be pressed to select curves in next
cross-section. After selection of section's is complete, user has to press the Enter button, if only
start point and curves has to be used, then solid will be created after pressing Enter. Otherwise
user has to specify another (end) point. After specifying end point, solid will be created using
start point, curves and end point. If the selected curves in a cross-section are not closed, then an
error message will be displayed.

8.7 Boolean Operations (Union / Difference / Intersection / Trim)


8.7.1 Union, Difference and Intersection
With this choice, the user can combine solids by using boolean combination operations, such as
union, difference, intersection and trimming. Once an operation is selected any number of
combination operations can be performed. To create a solid object, first the user has to select the
type of boolean operation in the solid’s menu. Then the system asks for the selection of base solid
and other solids. A transform group entity containing solids only can be selected as solid entity
to be booleaned. Internally the solids in the transform group are converted to a Solid compound
entity ("solcomp" in entity tree) which is then used in the boolean operation with the base solid.
On pressing the Enter button, the solid object will be created and displayed. The entity tree is
also refreshed and new solid object(obj) is added. If the operation fails, an error dialog message
is displayed.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 126


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.7.2 Trim
With this choice, the user can trim a solid with a surface or curve(s). Trimming would create a
solid object (underlying base solid and solid halfspace entity) removing the portion of the base
solid on the specified side of the surface/curve(s) used for trimming.

Figure 8-18: Partially extending surface


Figure 8-17: Fully extending surface

On invoking this operation, the system would prompt for the solid to be trimmed and the
surface/curve(s). Further the system would prompt for the side to be removed. Once the user
provides the above inputs, the selected solid would be trimmed and the resultant solid object
would be displayed. In case of solid trimming with curves,
user has to press N key after selecting trimming curves and
after that user is prompted for the side to be removed. In
case, selected curves are not continuous, a continuity error
showing 'Curves are not continuous' is displayed to user.
For proper results during trimming, the surface should
protrude out of the solid from all sides. Partial penetration
of the solid by the surface would give incorrect output.
Similarly, the curves used for trimming should be
continuous, ideally lie on the current work plane and
extend beyond the solid at both ends of the curve. Figure 8-19: Partially and fully extending curves
Further, it is advised to trim with open curves, as
trimming with closed curves also might throw unexpected results.

8.8 Blend/ Chamfer


8.8.1 Blend
Blend operation also known as fillet creation in some CAD software’s and is basically used to
smoothen the sharp edges and corners of the solid with the smooth curvature form applied along
the edges and corners of the solid. The blends applied on sharp edges/corners results in convex

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 127


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

form curvature. Apart from the sharp


edges/corners, blend(s) can also be
applied on common interior
edges/corners (i.e. non-sharp
edges/corners) between two or more
faces of the solid, which results in concave
form curvature.

8.8.1.1 Types of blend radius evolution

8.8.1.1.1 Constant Radius


In this case, radius of the blend is constant Figure 8-20: Convex and Concave blend shapes
along the length of the edge.

8.8.1.1.2 Two Radii


In this case two radii are specified. Blend will be created
with radius evolution from start radius to end radius along
the edge.

8.8.1.1.3 Parameter-Radius
In this case a set of parameter-radius pair values are
specified. The blend with corresponding radius values at the
respective parameter lengths along the edge(s) of the solid
will be created. The parameter ranges between 0.0 and 1.0.
In dialog box while entering the parameter, radius pair Figure 8-21: Constraint Radius Blend
values, they must be separated either by comma (,) or by a
space.

8.8.1.2 Blend creation methods


To create Solid Blend, go to Solids menu then go to Blending
sub menu. Following are the types of blend:
• Global Blend
• Edge Blend
• Vertex Blend
• All Edges of Face
• Face-Face
Figure 8-22: Two Radii Blend

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 128


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.8.1.2.1 Global Blend


As the name suggests, in this case all edges and corners of the
selected solid will be blended with the given radius value.
When the user selects the global blend from menu, system
prompts the following message:
• Select Solid to Blend and press enter
• On selecting the solid, a dialog will pop up requesting the
user to specify the blend parameters. From the drop-down
combo box select the radius type for the blend. Enter the
radius data and click OK.
With the given parameters blend will be created along all the
edges and the corners of the selected solid and the blended Figure 8-23: Parameter Radius
Blend
solid will be displayed.

Figure 8-24: Global blend with constant radius, two radii and parameter-radii

8.8.1.2.2 Edge Blend


In edge blend option, the selected edges of the solid will be blended with the given radius value.
When the user selects edge blend, system prompts for selecting the edges of the solid to be
blended.
• Select Edges to Blend and Press Enter: Click the mouse close to the edge of the solid to blend,
the solid gets highlighted and the selected edge's colour changes to red. Select all the edges
to blend and press enter.
• A dialog will pop up requesting the radius value(s) for the blend. Enter the radius data and
click OK. Blend on selected edges will be created with the given radius.
Note: If user blended two meeting edges at a corner with some radius value in one pass and try
to blend the other edge(s) meeting at the corner later, then the radius for this blend should be
less than the radius of the blend previously generated for the other edges meeting at this corner.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 129


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-25: Edge blend with constant radius, two radii and parameter-radii

8.8.1.2.3 Vertex Blend


In case of vertex blend, the vertex region and all the edges meeting at the selected vertex get
blended with the given blend radius, resulting in smooth curvature shape at the selected vertex
region. When the user selects the Vertex blend operation, system prompts the user to select the
Vertices of the solid to blend.
• Select Vertices to Blend and Press Enter: Click the mouse close to the Vertices to blend. Solid
gets highlighted and the selected vertices are marked with the point marker. Once user
selected all the vertices to be blended, press enter.
• A dialog will pop up requesting the radius value(s) for the blend. Enter the radius data and
click OK.
If the operation is successful, all the selected vertices along with the edges sharing those vertices
and the continuity edges will get blended.

Figure 8-26: Vertex blend with constant radius, two radii and parameter-radii

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 130


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.8.1.2.4 All Edges of Face


This option allows the user to create the blends on all edges of the selected face. When the user
selects this menu item, system prompts:
• Select solid face and press Enter
• After selecting the face, a Dialog will pop up requesting the user to enter the blend radius
value(s). Enter the radius data and press OK.
If the operation is successful, all edges of the selected face will get blended.

Figure 8-27: Blend all edges of selected face

8.8.1.2.5 Face-Face
This option allows the user to create the blend between the two meeting faces of the solid. The
blend will be created along the common edge between the two meeting faces. When the user
selects this menu item, system prompts:
• Select face of a solid.
• System then prompts for the next face
• Select solid face and press Enter.
• After selecting the two faces, a dialog will pop up requesting the user to enter the blend
radius value(s). Enter the radius data and click OK.
If the operation is successful, blend will be created along the common edge between the selected
faces.
Error messages:
If a Solid blend is not created, the system displays an error message
• Remote Exception - Construction Error
• Solid Blend Creation Failed

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 131


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-28: Blend along the common edge between two selected faces

8.8.1.3 Modify
Modification of Solid Blend is possible. With this user can modify the blend data and regenerate
the blend(s) with the modified data.

8.8.2 Chamfer
Using this feature, user can create chamfer(s) on the solid edge(s). To create Solid Chamfer, go
to Solids menu then to Chamfer sub menu. Following options are available.
• Global
• Edge (equal dist)
• Edge (dist-dist)

8.8.2.1 Global Chamfer


When the user selects the Global Chamfer, system prompts
the following message:
• Select Solid and Press enter
• On selecting the solid, a dialog will popup requesting
the user to specify the chamfer distance. Enter the
chamfer distance and press OK button.
With the given distance the Chamfer will be processed on
all edges (global) of the selected solid and the resultant
solid with chamfered edges will be displayed.
NOTE: Distance is the distance of the chamfer edges to be Figure 8-29: Global Chamfer
created from the original edge that is to be chamfered
along the two faces sharing this edge. In case of global chamfer distances along the two faces are
same.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 132


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.8.2.2 Edge Chamfer (equal dist)


Using this option user can create the chamfer on the selected edge with equal chamfer distance
from the selected edge along the faces joining at this edge. When the user clicks the menu item
"Edge (equal dist)", system prompts the user to select the edge of the solid to be chamfered.
• Select edge to chamfer
• Click the mouse close to the edge of the solid to chamfer, the selected edge gets highlighted
(in red colour), if user want to select more edges, continue the selection and at the end press
"Enter" to complete the selection. Then a dialog will popup requesting the user to supply the
chamfer parameters. Enter value for chamfer distance in the dialog box.
With the given parameters chamfer(s) will be processed along the selected edge(s) and the
resultant solid with chamfered edges will be displayed.

Figure 8-30: Edge Chamfer (Equal Distance)

8.8.2.3 Edge Chamfer (dist-dist)


Using this option user can specify the chamfer distance from the selected edge along the adjacent
face joining this edge. When the user clicks the menu item "Edge(dist-dist)", system prompts the
user to select the edge of the solid to be chamfered.
• Select edge to chamfer: Click the mouse close to the edge of the solid to chamfer, the selected
edge gets highlighted (in red colour) and then system prompts the user to select the
corresponding face along which the "Distance:1" of the chamfer to be measured.
• Select face to indicate the first distance side: With mouse pointer, select the face that is
sharing the edge to be chamfered to indicate the first distance side. The selected face gets
highlighted (in red colour) and then system prompts user to select more edges to be
chamfered or press "Enter".
• Select Edge for another chamfer OR Enter
• If user want to chamfer more edges, then repeat the above selection process responding to
the system prompts. At the end press "Enter" to complete the selection.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 133


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Then a dialog will popup requesting the user to supply the chamfer parameters. There are
two options available to specify the slant,
o Distance-Distance: If the Distance-Distance option is selected for slant, give the
values for "Distance:1" and "Distance:2" of the chamfer.
o Distance-Angle: If Distance-Angle option is selected for slant, then give the values for
"Distance:1" and "Angle".

Figure 8-31: Edge Chamfer (Distance-Distance)

Figure 8-32: Edge Chamfer (Distance-Angle)

• NOTE: "Distance:1" is measured along the selected face.


With the given parameters chamfer(s) will be processed along the selected edge(s) and the
resultant solid with chamfered edges will be displayed.
Error messages:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 134


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

If a Solid chamfer is not created, the system displays an error message: Solid Chamfer Creation
Failed

8.9 Solid Pattern


With this choice user can create Solid patterns. Solid Pattern involves array and copying of the
reference solid on base solid and then performing the boolean union or difference operation.
• Pattern types.
• Rectangular Pattern
• Circular Pattern (Also refer Tutorial)
• Curve Driven Pattern

8.9.1 Rectangular Pattern


The user needs to select the base solid, the reference solid and the base point for translation.
Then a dialog box will be displayed for the input of number of rows, columns, row delta, column
delta and the option of fuse/cut boolean operation. If the stretch of number of rows/columns
exceeds the planar surface area of the solid, then message dialog box is thrown to the user
indicating the row/ column number which is not going to be within the area of the planar surface.
To create Rectangular Pattern, go to Solids menu and then select the Rectangular menu item
under the Pattern submenu. System prompts the following message:
• Select planar face of the Solid
• After selecting the face of the solid, System prompts the user to Select reference solid
• After selecting the reference solid, System prompts the user to Specify base point for
translation
• After selecting the base point, System prompts the user to Specify head point on pattern solid
• After selecting the head point, the row and column directions will be displayed at the head
point. A dialog box will pop up for the boolean type (i.e Fuse or Cut), number of rows,
columns, Delta rows and Delta columns.
After selecting the OK button, a Rectangular Pattern Solid will be displayed.
Error messages:
If Pattern solid is not created, the system displays an error message:
• Remote Exception or Construction Error
• Making the Pattern Solid failed

8.9.1.1 Modify
It is possible to modify the Pattern solid. The user can modify the number of rows, columns, row
delta, column delta and the boolean operation. The user can modify the parameters of the base
solid and the reference solid. i.e. If the user modifies the parameters of reference solid say, the
diameter of the cylinder, then it will be reflected on all the cylinders of the pattern solid.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 135


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.9.2 Circular Pattern


The user needs to select the base solid, the reference solid, the base point for translation, pattern
center point and a head point on the base solid. Then a dialog box will be displayed for the input
of number of instances, angular spacing, clockwise
direction and the option of fuse/cut boolean operation.
If the stretch of instances exceeds the planar surface
area of the solid, then message dialog box is thrown to
the user indicating the instance number which is not
going to be within the area of the planar surface. To
create Circular Pattern, go to Solids menu and then
select the Circular menu item under the Pattern
submenu. System prompts the following message:
• Select planar face of the Solid
• After selecting the face of the solid, System
prompts the user to Select reference solid
• After selecting the reference solid, System
Figure 8-33: Cylinder (reference solid) fused to the
prompts the user to Specify base point for slab (base solid) in 8 instances at an angle of 45deg
translation
• After selecting the base point, System prompts the user to Specify center point for circular
pattern
• After selecting the center point, System prompts the user to Specify head point on pattern
solid
• After selecting the head point, a dialog box will pop up for the boolean type (i.e. Fuse or Cut),
number of instances, angular spacing, clockwise direction.
After selecting the OK button, a Circular Pattern Solid will be displayed.

8.9.2.1 Modify
It is possible to modify the Pattern solid. The user can modify the number of instances, angular
spacing, clockwise direction and the boolean operation. The user can modify the parameters of
the base solid and the reference solid. i.e. If the user modifies the parameters of reference solid
say, the diameter of the cylinder, then it will be reflected on all the cylinders of the pattern solid.

8.9.3 Curve Driven Pattern


The user needs to select the face of the base solid, the curve, the reference solid and the base
point. Then a dialog box will be displayed for the input of number of instances, Spacing, fuse/cut
boolean option, Pattern type option and reference solid retaining option. If user clicks on the
reference solid retaining option, then the reference solid will not become the part of the pattern
solid. To create Curve Driven Pattern, go to Solids menu and then select the Curve driven menu
item under the Pattern submenu.
System prompts the following message:
• Select the face of the Solid

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 136


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• After selecting the face of the solid, System prompts the user to Select the curve driven.
• After selecting the curve, System prompts the user to Select the Reference solid.
• After selecting the Reference solid, System prompts the user to Specify the base point
• After selecting the base point, a dialog box will pop up for the boolean type (i.e Fuse or Cut),
Pattern type (i.e. Number of instances, Spacing, both), number of instances, Spacing, Retain
the reference solid.
After selecting the OK button, a Curve driven Pattern Solid will be displayed.
Error messages:
If Pattern solid is not created, the system displays an error message:
• Remote Exception or Construction Error
• Making the Pattern Solid failed

8.9.3.1 Modify
It is possible to modify the Pattern solid. The user can modify the number of instances and the
boolean type. The user can also modify the parameters of the reference solid.

8.10 Mechanical Features


With this choice user can create features. Feature creation involves local operation on the
selected face of the solid in contrast to the global operations performed on the whole solid in
regular boolean operations. Local operations are much faster and much efficient compared to
global boolean operations. The following feature types are available.

8.10.1 Extrude
User can create extrude feature of any shape with
a closed profile(profile can consist any type of
curves like basic lines, arcs, bezier curves or b-
spline curves) on the selected face of the
solid(solid can be any primitive or object with one
exception of Spherical face for which feature
creation is not supported). User can either create
the protrusion or depression (i.e. cut) of the
profile shape of given distance/depth on the
selected face of the solid. To create extrude
feature, go to Solid menu and then select Features
and then Extrude menu item. System prompts the Figure 8-34: Extrude feature (Protrusion &
following message: Depression)

• Select Face of a Solid


• After selecting the face of the solid, System prompts the user to Select the closed profile for
Extrusion and press Enter

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 137


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• After selecting the valid closed profile, a dialog will popup requesting the user to input the
Type (i.e. Protrusion or Depression), Distance/Depth, Draft angle and perform option. If the
user won't select the perform option, the System creates the extrusion (Protrusion or
Depression) of given distance/depth on the selected face of the selected profile shape.
• If the draft angle is more than zero, then draft extrusion will be created. If the user selects
the perform option (i.e. up to selected face), then system prompts the user to Select solid
face and press Enter
• After selecting the solid face, extrusion will be created up to the selected face.
Error messages:

If extrusion is not created, the system displays an error message:

• Remote Exception or Construction Error


• Making the Extrusion Failed

8.10.1.1 Modify
Modification of Extrude feature is possible. With this user can modify the type, distance/depth
and draft angle of the extrude feature.

8.10.2 Revolve
User can create Revolved feature with a closed profile on the selected face of the solid and the
revolution will be defined by the axis. Fuse type offers a choice between removing the matter
with a boolean cut or adding the matter with a boolean fusion. To create Solid Revolve Feature,
go to Solid menu and then select Features and then Revolve menu item. System prompts the
following message:
• Select Face of the Solid as sketch face
• After selecting the face of the solid, System prompts the user for axis line. User can select
either line entity, surface edge or solid edge
• After selecting the axis line, System prompts the user to Select the profile curves and press
Enter
• After selecting the valid closed profile, a dialog will popup requesting the user to input the
fuse type (i.e. Fuse or Cut), revolution angle and perform option. If the user won't select the
perform option, the System creates the Revolved feature up to given revolution angle.
• If the user selects the perform option, then system prompts the user to Select solid face and
press Enter
• After selecting the solid face, Revolved Feature will be created up to the selected face. In case
if protrusion won't touch the selected solid face, then revolved feature will be created for
360 degrees revolution angle.

8.10.2.1 Modify
Modification of Solid Revolve Feature is possible. With this user can modify the fuse type and
revolution angle of the Feature

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 138


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.10.3 Pipe
User can create Pipe feature by sweeping a profile along a path from the selected face of the solid.
Fuse type offers a choice between removing the matter with a boolean cut or adding the matter
with a boolean fusion. To create Solid Pipe Feature, go to Solid menu and then select Features
and then Pipe menu item. System prompts the following message:
• Select Face of the Solid
• After selecting the face of the solid, System prompts the user for path curve
• After selecting the sweep path curve, System prompts the user to Select the profile curves
and press Enter
• After selecting the valid closed profile, a dialog will popup requesting the user to input the
fuse type (i.e. Fuse or Cut) and perform option. If the user won't select the perform option,
the System creates the Pipe feature up to the length of sweep path curve.
• If the user selects the perform option, then system prompts the user to Select solid face and
press Enter
• After selecting the solid face, Pipe Feature will be created up to the selected face. In case if
protrusion won't touch the selected solid face, then Pipe feature will be created up to the
length of sweep path curve.

8.10.4 Hole
With this option, user can create the cylindrical holes
of desired diameter (both blind and thru holes) on
the selected face of the selected solid. To create hole
feature, go to Solid menu and then select Features
and then Hole menu item. System prompts the
following message:
• Select solid face and press Enter
• After selecting the solid face, a dialog will popup,
in which user can give the input data for the hole,
Figure 8-35: Hole feature
like hole type i.e. blind or thru hole, hole creation
at a point on the selected face or hole creation along the axis line, depth and radius of the
hole.
• After giving the appropriate data in the dialog and press the OK button, based on the hole at
option system will prompt the following message.
o If the user selects the hole at "Point" option, then the user is asked to Click on the
selected face where he wants to create hole and press Enter. Hole will be created on
the selected face at clicked point
o If the user selects the hole at "Axis" option, then user is asked to Select the Axis Line
and press Enter. Hole will be created along the selected axis

8.10.4.1 Modify

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 139


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Modification of hole feature is possible. With this user can modify the hole type, ie blind or thru
hole, depth of the hole and radius of the hole.

8.10.5 Rib
With this option, user can create the Rib feature on Solid with the given profile and thickness.
Thickness can be specified on either side (i.e. right or left side) of the selected profile or on both
sides of the profile. The profile should be open. The profile shouldn’t be a closed one and the ends
of the profile should be touching (or intersecting) the corresponding faces of the solid on which
the profile slides to create the Rib. For linear Rib creation, only planar faces are supported. To
create Rib feature, go to Solid menu and then select Features and then Rib/Slot menu item.

Figure 8-36: Rib feature - Right & Left sides of profile

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 140


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

System prompts the following message:


• Indicate Solid
• After selecting the solid, the System prompts user to Select profile curves and Press Enter
• Select the curve(s) for the profile and press Enter. The profile must be touching the faces of
the selected solid on which the rib is going to be created.
• A popup dialog will be displayed, requesting the user input for the rib, i.e. rib type, thickness
on right side and thickness on the left side of the profile. System displays a point marker on
the profile, indicating the parametric direction of the profile. Right side and left side of the
profile is determined by looking along the point marker direction, assume that user is
standing at the base of the point marker and look towards the arrow direction, then on his
right hand side will be the right side of the profile and his left hand side will be the left side
of the profile. Enter the appropriate values and press OK.
• In case of revolve rib, user needs to select the axis line. System prompts user to select Axis
Line
Once the input is complete, Rib will be created and displayed.
Note: It is highly recommended that the profile ends must be touching or intersecting with the
faces of the solid. So, make sure that the profile ends touch or intersect with the solid faces

8.10.5.1 Modify:
Modification of Rib Feature is possible. With this user can modify the thickness of the Rib.

8.10.6 Slot
With this option, user can create the Slot feature on Solid with the given profile and thickness.
Thickness can be specified on either side of the selected profile or on both sides of the profile.
The profile should be open. The profile shouldn’t be a closed one and the ends of the profile
should be touching (or intersecting) the corresponding faces of the solid on which the profile
slides to create the Slot. Only planar faces are supported for creation of slot. Creation of slot on
curved faces is not supported. To create Slot feature, go to Solid menu and then select Features
and then the Rib/Slot menu item. System prompts the following message:
• Indicate Solid
• After selecting the solid, the System prompts user to Select profile curves and Press Enter
• Select the curve(s) for the profile and press Enter. The profile must be touching the faces of
the selected solid on which the Slot is going to be created. A popup dialog will be displayed,
requesting the user input for the Slot, i.e. thickness on either side of the profile. System
displays a point marker on the profile, indicating the parametric direction of the profile.
Right side and left side of the profile is determined by looking along the point marker
direction, assume that user is standing at the base of the point marker and look towards the
arrow direction, then on his right hand side will be the right side of the profile and his left
hand side will be the left side of the profile. Enter the appropriate values and press OK.
Once the input is complete, Slot will be created and displayed.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 141


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-37: Slot feature

Note: It is highly recommended that the profile ends must be touching or intersecting with the
faces of the solid. So, make sure that the profile ends touch or intersect with the solid faces

8.10.6.1 Modify
Modification of Slot Feature is possible. With this user can modify the thickness of the Slot.

8.10.7 Glue
With this option, user can glue i.e. attach two solids along the contact faces and make a single
object from it. The two solids to be glued must have close contact along the contact faces. The
base solid face on which the glue solid face is to be glued must be larger and its boundaries must
enclose the boundaries of the glue face. It means the base face must be larger than the glue face.
To create Glue feature, go to Solid menu and then select Features and then Glue Feature menu
item. System prompts the following message:
• Select face of the base solid
• After selecting the face of the base solid, the System prompts to Select face of the glue solid
and Press Enter
• Select the contact face of the glue solid and press enter. The glue feature will be created
joining the two solids along the selected contact faces. Remember the face to be glued must
be completely enclosed within the boundaries of the base solid face on which this face is
being glued.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 142


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-38: Glue feature

8.10.8 Face Split


With this option user can split the face of the solid with a split plane. For example, to split a given
shape of patch on the face of a solid, user can create the split plane of that shape and use it to
split the face of the solid. This will split the patch of that shape on the face of the solid. The
required shape patch thus split from the original face of the solid can be used as a tool to create
extrusion or depression features. The split patch can also be used for glue operations where the
glue face is larger than the base face. In such cases one can split the required size patch from the
glue face and use this patch as glue face to glue it on to the base face of the base solid. Split can
also be used to split multiple faces of the solid in one go, provided the split plane passes through
these multiple faces forming closed boundaries for the patches to be created. Note: the cut plane
passing through the face partially leaving the open boundaries will fail to split the face. To use
the Face Split feature, go to Solid menu and select Features and then Face Split menu item. System
prompts the following message.
• Indicate Solid or TransformGroup.
• After selecting the solid, the System prompts to Indicate Surface.
• Select the surface (i.e. split plane) and press Enter. If the section between the split plane and
the solid face forms a closed boundary on its own or along with the edges of the face, split
will be successful.
Once the operation is successful, user can see that the original face has been split into fragments
NOTE: User may need to hide/blank the split plane to clearly visualize the split patch.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 143


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

8.11 Mass Property Analysis


For solid entities the following properties will be computed:
• Volume
• Mass
• Center of Gravity
• Quadratic moments and radius of Gyration
• Moments at (0,0,0)
• Principal Axes
• Principal Moments of Inertia
• Principal Radii of Gyration
This option is available under Tools Menu. Go to
Analysis after Tool menu. If the selected entity is of
solid type, then a dialog will pop up requesting the
Figure 8-39: Parameters to Solid Analysis
user to enter the density value of the material of this
solid entity. Enter appropriate density value according to the material and press "OK" button.
Above mentioned list of properties will be computed for this selected solid.

Figure 8-40: Solid Mass, Volume Analysis

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 144


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 8-41: Solid Quadratic Moments Analysis

The center of gravity of the solid is visually shown with point marker in orange colour. Once the
tabbed dialog is closed, the point marker at the center of gravity gets detached from the canvas.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 145


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 9. Assembly Design and 3D Constraints

9.1 Introduction
Assembly Design module serves the purpose of creating "Product" by assembling the parts
created in part design module by applying constraints on to these parts. Assembly consists of
large number of parts, sub-assemblies which are placed in their desired positions with required
alignment, mating conditions etc. by applying the constraints on to these parts. The current
version of Assembly design module is based on
bottom-up approach, where the predesigned parts
are brought inside the assembly. To begin an
Assembly Design in CollabCAD, after logging in,
System prompts the following message:
• Open New or Existing Design
• In response to this prompt, click on "File-
>New" menu item from menu bar or the
corresponding "new" tool bar icon. A dialog
will popup requesting the user to enter the
design variables.
• Select "Assembly Design" as the design mode. Figure 9-1: Selecting Assembly Design mode
The default name for the assembly is given by the
system in incremental numbers post fixed to the "Product", i.e. when user first open the new
assembly design, the default name of the design would be "Product1". User can change this name
to any meaningful name if desired. Then click "OK" button. Now user is entered into Assembly
Design module of CollabCAD. Menu bar corresponding to Assembly Design appears. The menus
are listed as below.
• Insert
• MarkUp
• Tolerance

9.2 Insert
Insert menu is the most important menu in "Assembly Design" module. It contains all the menu
items necessary for assembling the parts/components like, inserting the already designed
component into assembly, applying the constraints, multi instantiation of the components etc.
The menu items under this menu are listed as below:
• Constraints(3D)
• Component
• Edit Component
• Update Component

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 146


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Multi Instantiation

9.2.1 Component
The predesigned Parts (i.e. designed in Part Design mode) can be inserted into the assembly
using this menu. When the user selects this menu item, the File chooser opens, from which user
can select the required Part file to be inserted into the assembly.
All the Solid entities in the selected part file would be converted into the component on the fly
while inserting the part file into the assembly. In this case the component name will be the same
as Part file name with instance number post fixed to it. For example, if the part file named
"NicPart.muz" is inserted into the assembly then the corresponding component name for this
inserted part would be "NicPart:1".
The numeric value in the component name after colon (":") is the instance number of this
component in this assembly. As the user creates more instances of this component or inserts the
same component many times, this number in the component name after the colon increases
automatically indicating the current instance number of this component in this assembly.

9.2.2 Multi Instantiation


In assembly design it is very common to use number of instances of the same component
depending on the requirement of that component. In such cases we need not insert the
component each time from the part file, instead insert the component into assembly only once
and make the instances of the inserted component as many as required and use these instances
wherever this component is required in the assembly. Using this menu user can create instances
of the component already inserted into assembly. Each instance gets unique instance number
given by the system automatically. When the user selects this menu, System prompts the
following message:
• Select Entities for Copy
• Select the component(s) for which user wants to make the instances and press "Enter". A
dialog will pop up requesting the translate parameters for X, Y, Z and number of copies.
After entering these values, click "OK". The requested number of instances will be created.

9.2.3 Edit Component


After a component has been inserted into the assembly, if the user wants to make changes to the
component geometry, this menu enables the user to make the changes to the selected
component. Once this menu is selected, the System prompts the following message:
• Select Component to Edit
• Select the component to edit, and press "Enter". If there are more than one instance of this
component exists in the assembly then the system asks the confirmation from the user
whether to edit all instances of that component or only the selected instance, by splashing a
message dialog with message "Do you want to Edit all instance of the component". If user
presses "Yes" then, the part file for this component will be opened in a new tab. In case user
presses "No" in response to the above message, then the system prompts the user to give a

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 147


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

new name for this part file to save the changes made to this instance only (i.e. user is
intended to make changes only to this instance, not all instances of this component).
• Enter the name of the to save this part changes. The part file for this instance gets opened
with the given new part name.
Make the changes to the part thus opened and save it. Once user saves the changes to the part,
the part gets closed. User will be back into the working assembly.

9.2.4 Update Component


After the changes to the part are saved, to bring those changes into the component of the
assembly, we need to update. This menu enables the user to update the components in the
assembly with the changes made to their corresponding part files.
Once this menu is selected, the System updates the components in the assembly.

9.3 Mark-Up
MarkUp menu contains the visual utility function menus that help the designers, particularly in
collaborative assembly design scenarios. In collaborative assembly design as multiple designers
from different locations are accessing the same assembly and trying to add their components to
the assembly, at times it becomes confusing for other designers in understanding what the other
designer is inserting and for what purpose. In such cases the designer can directly point to
component, by marking the area with red mark, adding the explanatory text over there and
adding the descriptive labels. This utility facilitates the designers to work in collaboration with
interactive queries and explanations during the assembling of the components.

9.3.1 Add Text


More explanatory text can be added at any point of time using this menu item. The procedure for
adding text is same as explained above. The text can be added at multiple locations by clicking at
different locations.

9.3.2 Add Label


Using this menu, a label can be attached to any component in the assembly. Once user selects this
menu item, the System prompts:
• Indicate Entity: Select the component to which user want to add the label.
• Then a label box with arrow pointer attached to the selected component appears on the
canvas in rubber-banding mode, the System prompts: Specify Text Position
• Click on the canvas where user want to place this label.

9.4 3D Constraints
The following types of 3 Dimensional Constraints are implemented in Assembly Mode.
• Axial Align

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 148


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Coplanar
• Fix
• Angular
• Perpendicular
• Parallel
• Distance
• Tangent
• Coincident
• Coordinate

9.4.1 Axial Align Constraint


With this choice, user can define Axial Align constraint. To define Axial Align Constraint, Go to
Insert menu -> Constraints then click on Axial Align. Axial Align Constraint Supports 3 types of
Axial Align alignment:
• Planar Face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Planar face and the selected Circular axis Axial
Align.
• Edge: Makes the 2 selected edges Axial Align.
• Edge-Planar Face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Edge or Planar face and the selected
Circular axis Axial Align.
The first selected entity is used as reference. This constraint aligns the second selected entity in
such a way that it becomes axially aligned with the first entity.
If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and
the first entity is free to move, then it aligns the first entity such that it is Axially Aligned with the
second entity.

Figure 9-2: Applying Axial Align Constraint

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 149


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

9.4.2 Coplanar Constraint


With this choice, user can define Coplanar constraint. To define Coplanar constraint, Go to Insert
menu -> Constraints then click Coplanar. Coplanar constraint aligns second entity in such a way
that it becomes Coplanar to the first entity.

Figure 9-3: Applying Coplanar Constraint

Select the entity of first part and entity of second part, Coplanar constraint aligns the parts such
that the entities become Coplanar. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which
will not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first arc such
that the first entity becomes Coplanar to the second entity.

9.4.3 Fixed Constraint


With this choice, user can define Fixed constraint. To define Fixed constraint, Go to Insert menu
-> Constraints then select Fix. This constraint allows users to fix the position of the entities.

9.4.4 Angular with value Constraint


With this choice, user can define Angular constraint. To define Angular constraint, Go to Insert
menu -> Constraints -> click on Angular with value. Angular Constraint Supports 3 types of
Angular alignment:
• Planar Face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Planar face and the selected Circular axis
inclined at the specified angle.
• Edge: Makes the 2 selected edges inclined at the specified angle.
• Edge-Planar Face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Edge or Planar face and the selected
Circular axis inclined at the specified angle.
If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and
the first entity is free to move, then it aligns the first entity such that it is inclined in the given
angle with the second entity.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 150


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 9-4: Applying Angular constraint

9.4.5 Perpendicular Constraint


With this choice, user can define Perpendicular constraint. To define Perpendicular constraint,
Go to Insert menu -> Constraints then click Perpendicular. Perpendicular Constraint Supports 3
types of Perpendicular alignment:
• Planar Face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Planar face and the selected Circular axis
perpendicular.
• Edge: Makes the 2 selected edges perpendicular.
• Edge-Planar Face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Edge or Planar face and the selected
Circular axis perpendicular.
For example, the Planar face of the box is selected first and then the circular axis of the cylinder
and press enter. The cylinder will align itself perpendicular to the selected planar face.

Figure 9-5: Applying Perpendicular constraint

The first selected entity is used as reference. The Perpendicular constraint aligns the second
selected entity in such a way that it becomes Perpendicular with the first entity. If the second
selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and the first entity
is free to move, then it aligns the first entity such that it is Perpendicular with the second entity.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 151


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

9.4.6 Parallel Constraint


With this choice, user can define Parallel Constraint. To define Parallel Constraint, Go to Insert
menu -> Constraints then click Parallel. Parallel Constraint Supports 3 types of Parallel
alignment:
• Planar face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Planar face and the selected Circular axis
parallel.
• Edge: Makes the 2 selected edges parallel.
• Edge-Planar face/Circular axis: Makes the selected Edge or Planar face and the selected
Circular axis parallel.
An example, the Planar face of the box is selected first and then the circular axis of the cylinder
and press enter. The cylinder will align itself parallel to the selected planar face.
The first selected entity is used as reference. The parallel constraint aligns the second selected
entity in such a way that it becomes parallel with the first entity. If the second selected entity
already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to
move, then it aligns the first entity such that it is parallel with the second entity.

Figure 9-6: Applying Parallel Constraint

9.4.7 Distance Constraint


With this choice, user can define Distance constraint (Specify the distance between two entities).
To define Distance constraint, Go to Insert menu -> Constraints then click Distance. Distance
Constraint Supports 4 types of Distance alignment:
Planar Face: Makes the distance between the selected Planar faces constant (user value). On
selection of planar faces, temporary arrow markers are displayed at the center of the faces. The
direction is based on the internal orientation of the faces. If the selected faces are parallel
(message is prompted), the parallel distance will be displayed in the dialog. The direction on the
face of the target entity is aligned to the direction on the face of the reference entity.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 152


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 9-7: Applying Distance constraint

• Edge: Makes the distance between the selected edges constant (user value).
• Vertex: Makes the distance between the selected vertices constant (user value).
• Edge-Face: Makes the distance between the selected edge and face constant (user value).
The first selected entity is used as reference. The Distance constraint aligns the second selected
entity in such a way that it lies at the constant Distance specified by user with the first entity. If
the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and
the first entity is free to move, then it aligns the first entity such that it is Distance constrained
with the second entity.

9.4.8 Tangent Constraint


With this choice, user can define Tangent constraint. To define Tangent constraint, Go to Insert
menu -> Constraints then click Tangent. Tangent constraint aligns second entity in such a way
that it becomes tangent to the first entity.

Figure 9-8: Applying Tangent constraint

Select the entity of first part and entity of second part, tangent constraint aligns the parts such

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 153


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

that the entities become tangent. If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will
not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first arc such that
the first entity becomes tangent to the second entity.

9.4.9 Coincident Constraint


With this choice, user can define Coincident constraint. To define Coincident constraint, Go to
Insert menu -> Constraints then click on Coincident. Select the First Entity (this entity will be the
Reference entity) and then Select the Second entity and press enter. 3D Coincident constraint
supports 3 type of Coincident alignment:
• Vertex: Aligns vertex of two entities.
• Circular Axis-Planar Face: coincides a circular axis to a planar face and vice versa.
• Edge-Face: Coincides edge of one entity with face of another entity.

Figure 9-9: Applying coincident constraint

The first selected entity is used as reference. The Coincident constraint aligns the second selected
entity in such a way that it becomes Coincident to the first entity. If the second selected entity
already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and the first entity is free to
move, then it aligns the first entity such that it is Coincident to the second line.

9.4.10 Coordinate Constraint


With this choice, user can define Coordinate Constraint. To define Coordinate constraint, Go to
Insert menu -> Constraints then click Coordinate Constraint. Coordinate constraint aligns second
entity in such a way that the selected plane of the second entity is synchronized with the selected
plane of the first entity.
If the second selected entity already has a constraint which will not allow the entity to move and
the first entity is free to move, then it aligns first entity such that the first entity becomes
synchronized to the selected plane of the second entity.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 154


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 10. Plot Configurator

10.1 Introduction
Plot Configurator is a drafting module of CollabCAD software, mainly used to generate drawing
views of a part/assembly modeled in Part/Assembly design mode of CollabCAD and apply
dimensions on entities, annotate, manufacturing symbols, adding tables, etc. It can be invoked
from CollabCAD application or as a stand-alone application.

10.2 View
The options in this menu refer to the view management of the Plot Configurator.

10.2.1 Standard
Using this option user can set a standard layout as per required type of projection. On invoking
this option, a list of available layouts would be displayed. Once a layout is selected, the same
would be displayed without any further user input.
By default, layouts are available for First Angle Projection, The Third Angle Projection and to
display All Views. Users can add more layouts into the list using the Save Layout option in the
File menu. Users can also delete a particular layout by clicking the check box in the dialog box
that appears.

10.2.2 Select
Using this option, the user can select a View and display it on the Plot Configurator. On invoking
this option, the user would be prompted to select the desired View. Once a view is selected, the
system would prompt for the diagonal points of the rectangular region in which the view is to be
displayed. On specifying the diagonal points, the selected view would be displayed in the
rectangular area.

10.2.3 Section
Using this option users can create a Sectional View and display it on the Plot Configurator. Users
can create Aligned Section Views as well as Offset Section Views.

Figure 10-1: Aligned and offset section view

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 155


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Aligned Sections can be created against One, Two or Three Lines, whereas Offset Sections are
always created using Three Lines. On invoking this option, the user would be prompted to specify
the Points denoting the alignment of the Section Lines. A maximum of Four points can be
specified, denoting Three Section Lines. In case of Aligned Sections, users can press Enter key
after specifying Two or Three Points to limit to One or Two Section Lines. A point can be specified
with respect to the previous point by entering Polar or Delta coordinates by pressing the 'P' or
'T' Keys. On specifying the Section Points, the system would prompt for the View Direction.
Once the Section Lines and the View Direction are specified, a dialog box would appear using
which the user can specify the Section Name and the Angle & Spacing for hatching. Besides, users
have the option to display the section views with or without Back Edges. In case of Aligned
Sectioning by One Line, Users have the option to modify the coordinates of the Section Line
Points, in this dialog box. Once these parameters are entered, the system would prompt for the
diagonal points of the rectangular region in which the sectional view is to be displayed. On
specifying the diagonal points, the sectional view would be displayed in the rectangular area.

Figure 10-2: Section View with and without back edges

10.2.4 Detail View


Using this option users can create a Detail View and display it on the Plot Configurator. On
invoking this option, the user would be prompted to specify the points denoting the diagonal
corners of the area to be zoomed. After specifying these points, the system would prompt for the
Scale and Name for Detail. Once these parameters are entered, the system would prompt for the
position where the detail view is to be placed.

10.2.5 Refresh
Using this option, the user can Refresh the views so that changes made in the 3D model would be
affected in the view also. All displayed views (except sectional views) would automatically get
refreshed by merely invoking this option. The 3D part should be kept open in CollabCAD while
performing the Refresh operation.

10.2.6 Front
Using this option, the user can display the Front view on the plot configurator. On invoking this
option, the system would prompt for the diagonal points of the rectangular region in which the

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 156


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

view is to be displayed. On specifying the diagonal points, the Front view would be displayed in
the rectangular area.

10.2.7 Right
Using this option, the user can display the Right view on the plot configurator. On invoking this
option, the system would prompt for the diagonal points of the rectangular region in which the
view is to be displayed. On specifying the diagonal points, the Right view would be displayed in
the rectangular area.

10.2.8 Top
Using this option, the user can display the Top view on the plot configurator. On invoking this
option, the system would prompt for the diagonal points of the rectangular region in which the
view is to be displayed. On specifying the diagonal points, the Top view would be displayed in
the rectangular area.

10.2.9 Isometric
Using this option, the user can display the Isometric view on the plot configurator. On invoking
this option, the system would prompt for the diagonal points of the rectangular region in which
the view is to be displayed. On specifying the diagonal points, the Isometric view would be
displayed in the rectangular area.

10.2.10 Auto Fit


The Auto Fit option is used to fit the drawing in all the views within the view boundary. To fit
only a single view, press F key keeping the cursor in the desired view.

10.2.11 Scale
Most often views drawn in plot configurator may need different scaling or uniform scaling to
make fine visibility. Increasing or decreasing Scaling value can be accomplished by the Number
spinner displayed in the scaling dialog. Alternatively, user can also enter desired value using
keyboard. Users can also specify the view height/width and modify the display type.

10.3 Move/Modify/Delete View


10.3.1 Modify
By invoking this option, the users can perform the following operations on various items (like
Views, Notes, Tables, Images) in the plot configurator.

10.3.2 Move
To move a plot item, press the mouse over the item and drag to the desired position.
• Resize: To resize a plot item, press the mouse over the boundaries and drag to the desired
size. (Not applicable for Point Texts).

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 157


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Pan: To pan the contents of a view, keep the Control key pressed and then press the mouse
over the view and drag to the desired position. (Not applicable for other items).
• Edit: To edit a plot item, double click the mouse over the item and the appropriate dialog box
for editing would be displayed. (Not applicable for Images).

10.3.3 Delete
Using this option user can delete his/her view permanently in the plot configurator. User can
also delete the table and text also using this option depending upon his/her requirement.

10.4 Dimension & Symbols


The options in this menu used to dimensioning the plot entities.

10.4.1 Horizontal Dimension


10.4.1.1 Standard
On invoking this option: The message box displays the
message 'Indicate First Dimension Reference '. In the
plot area, click the First point on the entity
horizontally to be dimensioned. The message box now
displays the message 'Indicate Second Dimension
Reference '. In the plot area, click the Second point on
the entity horizontally to be dimensioned. The
message box now displays the message 'Specify
Dimension Text Position'. Click the point where the
Dimension text is to be placed. A Horizontal Dimension
between the First & Second point is created and
displayed in the drawing area and in a similar way user
can create further horizontal dimension. Figure 10-3: Standard Horizontal Dimension

10.4.1.2 Chain
On invoking this option: The message box displays the
message 'Indicate First Chain Reference'. In the
drawing area, Click the First point on the entity to be
dimensioned. The message box now displays the
message 'Indicate Second Chain Reference'. In the
drawing area, click the Second point on the entity to
be dimensioned. The message box now displays the
message 'Indicate Point Position'. Click the point
where the Dimension text is to be placed and in a
similar way user can create further horizontal chain
dimension.

10.4.1.3 Stack Figure 10-4: Chain Horizontal Dimension

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 158


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

On invoking this option: The message box displays


the message 'Indicate Stack Base Reference'. In the
drawing area, click the Base point on the entity to
be dimensioned. This point is going to serve as the
base reference point for further dimensioning. The
message box now displays the message 'Indicate
First Stack Reference'. In the drawing area, click
the First point on the entity to be dimensioned. The
message box now displays the message 'Indicate
Point Position'. Click the point where the
Dimension text is to be placed. A Horizontal
Dimension between the Base and the First point is
created and displayed, and the message box now
displays 'Indicate Next Stack Reference'. In the
drawing area, click the Next point on the entity to
be dimensioned. On clicking on the Next point, a
dialog box appears asking for the Gap between the Figure 10-5: Stack Horizontal Dimension
two text to be displayed. Enter the value for the Gap.
This value gets fixed for the present session. Default is 20 and in a similar way user can create
further horizontal stack dimension.

10.4.1.4 Co-Ordinate
On invoking this option: The message box displays the message 'Specify Dimension Origin point'.
In the drawing area, click the Origin point on the entity to be dimensioned. This point is going to
serve as the base reference point for further
dimensioning.
The message box now displays the message
'Specify Dimension Text Position’. Click the
point where the Dimension text is to be placed.
A Horizontal Dimension (a single line) is
created and displayed. The value will be 0.0,
The message box now displays the message
'Specify Dimension Reference'. In the drawing
area, click the Dimension Reference point on
the entity to be dimensioned. The message box
now displays the message Specify Text
Position'. Click the point where the Dimension
text is to be placed. A Horizontal Dimension
between the Origin and the Dimension
Reference point is created and displayed. Note
that no base line is created, as is the case with
Figure 10-6: Co-Ordinate Horizontal Dimension
normal horizontal dimensioning.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 159


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

10.4.1.5 Cumulative
Using this option, users can create horizontal
dimensions to mark the cumulative distance
from a given point. On invoking this option,
the system would prompt: 'Select First
Dimension Reference'. In the drawing area,
click the Origin point on the entity to be
dimensioned. This point is going to serve as
the base reference point for further
dimensioning. On selecting this reference,
the system would prompt: 'Select Second
Dimension Reference'. When this reference
is also selected, the system would prompt:
'Select Dimension Text Position'. The user
can now place the dimension entity at the
desired location. Users can specify more
dimension references and the cumulative
dimension entities would get created at the Figure 10-7: Cumulative Horizontal Dimension
same horizontal level as that of the first entity.
Press Enter key to complete the operation.

10.4.2 Vertical Dimension


10.4.2.1 Standard
On invoking this option: The message box displays
the message 'Indicate First Dimension Reference '. In
the plot area, click the First point on the entity to be
dimensioned. The message box now displays the
message 'Indicate Second Dimension Reference '. In
the plot area, click the Second point on the entity to
be dimensioned. The message box now displays the
message 'Specify Dimension Text Position'. Click the
point where the Dimension text is to be placed. A
vertical Dimension between the First & Second point
is created and displayed in the drawing area and in
a similar way user can create further vertical
dimension. Figure 10-8: Standard Vertical Dimension

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 160


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

10.4.2.2 Chain
On invoking this option: The message box
displays the message 'Indicate First Chain
Reference'. In the drawing area, Click the First
point on the entity to be dimensioned. The
message box now displays the message 'Indicate
Second Chain Reference'. In the drawing area,
click the Second point on the entity to be
dimensioned. The message box now displays the
message 'Indicate Point Position'. Click the point
where the Dimension text is to be placed and in
a similar way user can create further vertical
chain dimension.
Figure 10-9: Chain Vertical Dimension

10.4.2.3 Stack
On invoking this option: The message box displays the message 'Indicate Stack Base Reference'.
In the drawing area, click the Base point on the entity to be dimensioned. This point is going to
serve as the base reference point for further
dimensioning. The message box now
displays the message 'Indicate First Stack
Reference'. In the drawing area, click the
First point on the entity to be dimensioned.
The message box now displays the message
'Indicate Point Position'. Click the point
where the Dimension text is to be placed. A
vertical Dimension between the Base and
the First point is created and displayed. , and
the message box now displays 'Indicate Next
Stack Reference'. In the drawing area, click
the Next point on the entity to be
dimensioned. On clicking on the Next point,
Figure 10-10 Stack Vertical Dimension
a dialog box appears asking for the Gap
between the two text to be displayed. Enter the value for the Gap. This value gets fixed for the
present session. Default is 20 and in a similar way user can create further vertical stack
dimension.

10.4.2.4 Co-Ordinate
On invoking this option: The message box displays the message 'Specify Dimension Origin point'.
In the drawing area, click the Origin point on the entity to be dimensioned. This point is going to
serve as the base reference point for further dimensioning.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 161


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

The message box now displays the message 'Specify


Dimension Text Position? Click the point where the
Dimension text is to be placed. A vertical Dimension (a
single line) is created and displayed. The value will be
0.0. The message box now displays the message ' Specify
Dimension Reference'. In the drawing area, click the
Dimension Reference point on the entity to be
dimensioned. The message box now displays the
message Specify Text Position'. Click the point where the
Dimension text is to be placed. A vertical Dimension
between the Origin and the Dimension Reference point Figure 10-11: Co-Ordinate Vertical
is created and displayed. Note that no base line is created, Dimension
as is the case with normal vertical dimensioning.

10.4.2.5 Cumulative
Using this option, users can create vertical dimensions to
mark the cumulative distance from a given point. On
invoking this option, the system would prompt: 'Select
First Dimension Reference'. In the drawing area, click the
Origin point on the entity to be dimensioned. This point is
going to serve as the base reference point for further
dimensioning. On selecting this reference, the system
would prompt: 'Select Second Dimension Reference'.
When this reference is also selected, the system would
prompt: 'Select Dimension Text Position'. The user can
now place the dimension entity at the desired location.
Figure 10-12: Cumulative Vertical Dimension
Users can specify more dimension references and the
cumulative dimension entities would get created at the
same vertical level as that of the first entity. Press Enter key to complete the operation.

10.4.3 Parallel Dimension


On invoking this option: The message box displays the
message 'Indicate First Dimension Reference '. In the plot
area, click the First point on the entity to be dimensioned. The
message box now displays the message 'Indicate Second
Dimension Reference '. In the plot area, click the Second point
on the entity to be dimensioned. The message box now
displays the message 'Specify Dimension Text Position'. Click
the point where the Dimension text is to be placed. A parallel
Dimension between the First & Second point is created and
displayed in the drawing area and in a similar way user can
create further parallel dimension. Figure 10-13: Parallel Dimension

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 162


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

10.4.4 Radius Dimension


On invoking this option: User is allowed to select an arc present inside a view which needs to be
dimensioned.
The first click on an arc will create a radius dimension and next consecutive click inside the same
view would position the text of the Radius Dimension.

Figure 10-14: Diameter Dimension


Figure 10-15: Radius Dimension

10.4.5 Diameter Dimension


Using this option user can add a diameter dimension for an arc present inside a plot view, The
first click on an arc will create a diameter dimension and the dimension's text will move as the
mouse cursor move inside the same view. Next consecutive click would position the text of the
Diameter Dimension

10.4.6 Thickness Dimension


Using this option users can create Thickness Dimensions to mark the distance between two Lines
or two concentric Arcs. On invoking this option, the
system would prompt: 'Select First Line or Arc to
Dimension'. On selecting a Line or Arc, the system would
further prompt for the second Line or Arc respectively.
On selection of the second entity, a Thickness Dimension
between the two entities would be created and
displayed.

10.4.7 Angular Dimension


Using this option user can add an Angular dimension
between two lines in a plot view, select a first and second
line by consecutive mouse click on them. Now the
Angular dimension between the lines is created and Figure 10-16: Thickness Dimension

moves with mouse cursor. Click the point where the


Dimension text is to be placed.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 163


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 10-17: Angular Dimension

10.4.8 Arc Length Dimension


Using this option user can add an Arc Length dimension for an arc in a plot view, select an arc by
mouse click on it. The Arc Length dimension is created and moves with mouse cursor. Click the
point where the Dimension text is to be placed.

Figure 10-18: Arc Length Dimension

10.4.9 Match
On invoking this option, the user is prompted to select the Reference and Target entities. On
selecting these entities and pressing the Enter key, a Tabbed Dialog box will be displayed with
General and Drafting properties. The default values displayed are that of the Reference Entity.
Only the properties selected by ticking in the check box, displayed on the left of the property
label, will be modified.
The user can also change the value of the ticked properties to any other desired value. In that
case, the user has the option to specify whether the properties of the Reference Entity also shall

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 164


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

be modified. If this option is selected, the properties of the Reference Entity also will be modified.
Otherwise, those of the target entities alone will be modified.

10.5 Annotation
The options in this menu used to add various symbols on a view.

10.5.1 Note
On invoking this option, a dialog box appears prompting the user to input the text to be displayed
in the Note along with the text alignment, line spacing and text style like Bold/Italic. The user can
also select any special character/symbol like phi, degree etc from the Symbol option. The
message box displays the message 'Enter Text'. On clicking OK in the dialog box, the message box
displays the message 'Specify Position'. Click at the position where the Note is to be created; and
the Note would be created at the desired position. Users can create any number of Notes with
the same text by merely specifying the position.

10.5.2 Hatch
Using this option users can create a Hatch entity from a set of boundary curves. On invoking this
option, the system would prompt to select the boundary for Hatch. Once the desired curves are
selected and Enter is pressed, the system would prompt for the Hatch Parameters. On
successfully proving the parameters the Hatch entity would be created.

10.5.3 Symbols
Using this option user can create the following type symbols which is used in manufacturing
drawing extensively.
• Welded Joints
• Weld
• Die Design
• Geometric Tolerance
• Surface Texture
On invoking this option, a dialog box will be displayed to select the category, and the
corresponding symbol from the combo box will be available to the user. The width and the height
of the symbol can also be specified by the user according to his requirement. After Pressing OK
button user can add his symbol to the entity he wants to specify.

10.5.4 Balloon
With this option the user can create a balloon with an arrow pointing to the entity. On invoking
this option: The message box displays the message 'Indicate Entity'. Click the Entity for which
the Balloon is to be created. The message box now displays the message 'Specify Balloon
Position'. Click the required Balloon Position Center. The message box now displays the message
'Enter balloon Type'. At this point indicate the Number of partitions required (ranges between 1

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 165


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

to 4) in the Balloon. Next, the user is prompted to Enter the text in each of the partitions. Enter
Text and Press ok. A Balloon is created with an arrow pointing to the entity.

Figure 10-19: Balloon Annotation

10.5.5 Datum Feature


With this option the user can create a Datum Feature Symbol and associated reference plane
within the frame with an arrow pointing to the entity. A datum is a theoretical plane which acts
as a master reference to locate features of a part during manufacturing and inspection. On
invoking this option: The message box displays the message 'Indicate Entity'. The message box
now displays the message 'Specify Datum Feature Symbol Position'. Click the required position
and Enter the Text to be displayed in the frame and press OK. A maximum of 2 characters are
allowed. If more characters are input an error message is displayed.

Figure 10-20: Datum Feature

10.5.6 Surface Texture


Surface texture or surface finish is the amount of geometric irregularity produced on the surface.
Surface texture notes on a drawing refer to the required finish that must be machined on any

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 166


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

particular surface. With this option the user can create a Surface Texture Symbol and associated
symbol with an arrow pointing to the entity. On invoking this option, the message box displays
the message 'Indicate Entity'. Click the Entity for which the Surface Texture Symbol is to be
created. After entering the surface texture parameters indicate the required position. A Surface
Texture Symbol is created with an arrow pointing to the entity.

Figure 10-21: Surface Texture

10.5.7 Feature Control Frame


With this option the user can add Geometric
tolerances and Symbol like size, location &
form tolerance to the dimensional entities of
various drawing standards of ANSI, BIS.
Geometric Tolerances are usually expressed
on engineering drawings via displaying
symbols called feature control frame. Size
tolerance controls the size(length/diameter)
of part features. Location tolerance controls
position and concentricity of various
features. Form tolerance controls the shape
of individual features or related features. On
invoking this option, the message box
displays the message 'Indicate Entity'. Click
the Entity for which the Feature Control Figure 10-22: Feature Control Frame
Frame Symbol is to be created. A Feature
Control Frame Symbol with user defined data is created with an arrow pointing to the entity.

10.5.8 Axis Line


Using this option user can create center line or axis representation. On invoking this option, the
message box displays the message indicate the start point of the Center Line and indicate the end
point of the Center Line. A Center Line is created between the first point and the second point.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 167


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 10-23: Axis line

10.5.9 Center Line


• Circle: Using this option users can create Center
Line representation about a Circle. On invoking this
option, the user would be prompted to select the
Circle. On selecting the circle, the Center Line entity
would be created about the center of the Circle.
• Point: Using this option users can create Center Line
representation about a Point. On invoking this
option, the user would be prompted to indicate the
Center and Outer point of the Center Line entity. On
providing these inputs, a Center Line would be
created about the first point.
Figure 10-24: Center Line

10.6 Bill of Material


BOM Tree is an option under Tools menu of plot configurator which helps user to create the Bill
of Material of the assembly made in assembly design workbench.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 168


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 11. Customizing CollabCAD

11.1 Configurable Menu Bar


The Menu Bar is user configurable menu-based menu bar. The menu bar is created using a user
configurable XML file that is located at <COLLABCAD_INSTALL_DIR> /config/menubar.
The file name is MenuBar.xml. Sample Menu Bar XML configuration File. User can study the
format of the XML file using the MenuBar.dtd and the MenuBar.xml file. In addition, the complete
structure is explained below. User may add/delete/change/reorganize the menu items, images,
callbacks etc. as desired in the default MenuBar.xml file provided. Menu Bar feature provide
users a facility to extend CollabCAD features by using the Jython scripts. User generated Jython
script files can be provided in the MenuBar.xml file.

11.1.1 How to create own menubar


To Create or configure MenuBar, user has to write new MenuBar.xml file or modify the
provided default MenuBar.xml file. For detailed structure description of the MenuBar.xml
file follow the details given below. There are two ways the function to the MenuItem buttons can
be given.
• Using the CollabCAD Java Functions
• Using the Jython scripts
• For Sample .py (Jython scripts) files see docs/english/examples/py
11.1.2 How to Add/Delete/Get reference of Menu Item/Menu
• To get the reference of a menuitem from menubar (eg. for menuitem(Cut) of menu(Edit))
user have to follow in this way
menubar.getMenu("Edit").getItem("Cut");

• To delete a menuitem from menu (eg. for menuitem(Close) of menu(File)) user have to
follow in this way
menubar.getMenu("File").deleteItem("Close");

• To delete a menu from menubar (eg. Help menu from MenuBar) user have to follow in this
way
menubar.removeMenuFromMenuBar("Help");

• To add a menu to menubar (e.g. Admin menu to MenuBar) user have to write an xml file
containing the menu and its menuitem details (see the sample xml file format)Sample
MenuBar XML configuration File. After that user have to follow in this way
menubar.addMenuToMenuBar("MenuBarAdmin.xml",null, numItems-1);

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 169


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• User has to provide xml file name and if there are any common arguments to all method then
he can pass the reference of it else write null and index on which menu is to be added.

11.1.3 Step to configure menu bar


Different elements for menu bar configuration are as follows:

11.1.3.1 MENUBAR
MENUBAR needs five attributes and can contain one or more number of MENUs. The attributes
are
• METHOD_CLASSLIST - This is the list of classes where all the java method exists. The
method declared in class can be in different packages. User can put these multiple paths
separated by semicolon.
• CONSTANT_CLASSLIST - This is the list of classes where all the constant exists. The constant
declared in class can be in different packages. User can put these multiple paths separated
by semicolon.
• JYPATH - This is the list of paths where .py files exists in users’ machine. The .py files can be
in multiple directories. User can put these multiple paths separated by semicolon. The
ToolPalette uses the paths provided to find the required .py files.
• JYEXECUTOR - This is the jython executor. User has to provide this in the format
'Class/Method' to execute Jython scripts.
IMGPATH - This is the list of paths where the image files exist in users machine. The image
files (eg .gif) can be in multiple directories. User can put these multiple paths separated by
semicolon. The ToolPalette uses the paths provided to find the required image files.

11.1.3.2 MENU
MENU has following attributes
• TEXT - This is the text of the MENU.
• MNEMONIC - This is the mnemonics of the MENU. This is Optional.
• IMAGE - This is the image of the MENU. This is Optional.
• ENABLED - This is the enable/disable status of the MENU. This is Optional.

11.1.3.3 SEPARATOR:
This is the separator between menu items.

11.1.3.4 MENUITEM:
It has following attributes
• TEXT - This is the text of the MENUITEM.
• MNEMONIC - This is the mnemonics of the MENUITEM. This is Optional.
• IMAGE - This is the image of the MENUITEM. This is Optional.
• ACCELARATOR - This is the accelerator key for the MENUITEM. This is Optional.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 170


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• ENABLED - This is the enable/disable status of the MENUITEM. This is Optional.

11.1.3.5 ACTION
Action needs one attribute and two elements. They are
• LANG - This is the attribute of ACTION element. This is either "JAVA" (if it is java method) or
"JYTHON" (if it is a .py script file).
• METHOD - User must provide a method that is callable statically from METHOD_CLASSLIST.
If user mentions some method that is not there with the appropriate arguments or the
method is not invokable then the user will see an error at the time of displaying the Tool
Palette or when he clicks on such a menu item button. If LANG="JYTHON" then method name
must be a Jython Script file name (eg. toleracne.py).
• ARGUMENT - User may need to provide the ARGUMENTs if the LANG="JAVA". If
LANG="JYTHON" then provide no ARGUMENT elements. ARGUMENT element needs one
attribute.
o TYPE - Argument type (i.e. INT, BOOLEAN, STRING)
o USEREFLECTION - Use Reflection or not to get the arguments value.

11.2 Configurable Tool Palette


The ToolPalette is user configurable tab-based Tool Palette. The tool palette is created using a
user configurable XML file that is located at <COLLABCAD_INSTALL_DIR>
/config/toolpalette. The file name is ToolPalette.xml. Sample ToolPalette XML
configuration File. User can study the format of the XML file using the ToolPalette.dtd and also
the ToolPalette.xml file. In addition, the complete structure is explained below. User may
add/delete/change/reorganise the buttons, images, descriptions, callbacks etc as desired in the
default ToolPalette.xml file provided. ToolPalette feature provide users a facility
to extend CollabCAD features by using the Jython scripts. User generated Jython script files can
be provided in the ToolPalette.xml file.

11.2.1 How to create own Tool Palette


To Create or configure ToolPalette, user has to write new ToolPalette.xml file or modify the
provided default ToolPalette.xml file. For detailed structure description of the ToolPalette.xml
file follow the details given below. There are two ways the function to the ToolPalette buttons
can be given
• Using the CollabCAD Java Functions
• Using the Jython scripts
For Sample .py (Jython scripts) files see docs/english/examples/py

11.2.2 How to open Tool Palette


On clicking right mouse button on the tool bar, a pop-up menu will be displayed. Select
'ToolPalette' checkbox to display ToolPalette. User can *Dock* the ToolPalette to a window using

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 171


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

the "D" button on it. To kill the ToolPalette click "X" button on it. To see this help file click on "H"
button.
At the center of the tool palette user can see different tabs (e.g. Solid, Surface, etc.). When a user
clicks on a particular tab, different tool items will be displayed under the different groups. On
clicking a particular tool item (i.e. a button), the user can perform the attached operation. Tool
Palette also provides description of each tool item to the user by simply moving the cursor on
the Tool Item.

11.2.3 How to configure Tool Palette


Different elements for tool palette configuration are as follows:

11.2.3.1 TOOLPALETTE
TOOLPALETTE needs three attributes and can contain one or more number of TOOLPANELs. The
attributes are
• TITLE - This is the title of the TOOLPALETTE.
• JYPATH - This is the list of paths where .py files exists in users’ machine. The .py files can be
in multiple directories. User can put these multiple paths separated by semicolon. The
ToolPalette uses the paths provided to find the required .py files.
• IMGPATH - This is the list of paths where the image files exist in users machine. The image
files (eg .gif) can be in multiple directories. User can put these multiple paths separated by
semicolon. The ToolPalette uses the paths provided to find the required image files.

11.2.3.2 TOOLPANEL
TOOLPANEL needs one attribute and consists of one or more number of BLOCKs. The attribute
is.
• TITLE - This is the title of the BLOCK.

11.2.3.3 BLOCK
BLOCK needs one attribute and consists of one or more number of ROWs. The attribute is.
• TITLE - This is the title of the BLOCK

11.2.3.4 ROW
ROW needs no attributes but one or more numbers of TOOLs. A TOOL represents a user clickable
button in the Tool Palette Panel.

11.2.3.5 TOOL
TOOL consists of
• TOOLTIP - This is the tooltip for tool button.
• IMAGE - This is the image (image icon) for tool button.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 172


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• DESC - This is the description of tool item to be displayed in the bottom of the Tool Palette
when user rolls over the mouse on the respective tool item button.
• ACTION - Action needs one attribute and two elements. They are
o LANG - This is the attribute of ACTION element. This is either "JAVA" (if it is java
method) or "JYTHON" (if it is a .py script file).
o METHOD - User must provide a method that is callable statically from
incad.gui.GUIOperations class. If user mentions some method that is not there with
the appropriate arguments or the method is not invokable then the user will see an
error at the time of displaying the Tool Palette or when he clicks on such a TOOL item
button. If LANG="JYTHON" then method name must be a Jython Script file name (e.g.
toleracne.py).
o ARGUMENT – User may need to provide the ARGUMENTs if the LANG="JAVA". If
LANG="JYTHON" then provide no ARGUMENT elements. ARGUMENT element needs
one attribute
▪ TYPE - Argument type (i.e. INT, BOOLEAN)

11.3 Hot Keys


CollabCAD provides a series of Hot Keys to switch over to an operation. Almost all frequently
used operations are provided with Hot Keys. In most cases the Hot Key invokes the
corresponding operation without disturbing the ongoing operation. Some of the Hot Keys are
active only during a particular operation. A - Arc creation by "Center & Radius" method.

1. Arrow - Pan the view.


2. C - Close a Polyline (During Polyline creation).
3. Ctrl + Mouse - Performs dynamic Zooming, Panning and Rotation.
4. D - Change Depth.
5. Delete - Delete Entity.
6. Enter - Complete Entity Selection.
7. Escape - Unselect the last selected entity (Only in some operations).
8. F - Auto Fit.
9. Ctrl+F - Change View to Front View.
10. F9 - Enable / Disable View Dynamic mode.
11. F11 - Restore view.
12. G - Enable / Disable Grid Snapping.
13. I - Enable / Disable Implicit selection.
14. J - Scales the view by half.
15. K - Scales the view by two-fold.
16. L - Line creation by "End Coordinates".

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 173


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

17. P - Point creation by coordinates.


18. R - Refreshing the view while in Shaded mode.
19. Ctrl+R - Change View to Right View.
20. S - Shade all (Solid and Surface) entities.
21. Space - Abort the on-going operation.
22. Ctrl+T - Change View to Top View.
23. V - Solve the relations (constraints).
24. W - Pan the view by screen position.
25. Z - Zoom an area indicated by screen position.
26. Ctrl+\ - Change View to Isometric View.

11.4 Tool Bar


1. Open a New Part.
2. Open an existing Part.
3. Save the current Part.

4. Print the page.


5. Undo the previous operation(s).
6. Redo the last undone operation(s).
7. Create point(s).
8. Create line(s).
9. Create rectangle(s).
10. Create polyline(s).
11. Create arc/circle(s).
12. Create arc(s) using three points.
13. Intersection between curves/surfaces.
14. Modify the entity.
15. Create horizontal dimensioning.
16. Create vertical dimensioning.
17. Create parallel dimensioning.
18. Define WorkSpace
19. Get the info of how many entities are there in the current part.
20. Delete entities.
21. Delete all the entities in the current part.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 174


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

22. Grid Snaping Enabled in the current part.


23. Grid Snaping Disabled in the current part.
24. Dynamics Enabled in the current part.
25. Dynamics Disabled in the current part.
26. Implicit selection Enabled in the current part.
27. Implicit selection Disabled in the current part.
28. Shading display Enabled in the current part.
29. Wireframe display Enabled in the current part.
30. Some Entities are masked from selection in the current session.
31. No Entities are masked from selection in the current session.
32. Measurement in mm Unit for the current part.
33. Measurement in inch Unit for the current part.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 175


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 12. Data Exchange

12.1 Import
Option to import IGES, STEP, STL, XML and BREP formats. When the user selects one of the
options from the import menu, a file chooser dialog will prompt the user to select the directory
and file. When the user repeats the operation the file chooser dialog will show the last visited
directory.

12.1.1 STEP Import


The system reads the STEP file selected in file chooser and translated their contents to CollabCAD
entities. STEP files conforming to AP 214, AP 203 can be read. Only geometrical and topological
STEP entities (shapes) are translated. The system translates STEP file created in any unit (from
an external CAD system) to the current unit of CollabCAD ( mm and inch are supported). The
model geometry is automatically scaled to the part unit used in CollabCAD.

12.1.2 STL Import


STL (STereoLithography) is a file format native to the stereolithography CAD software supported
by many other software packages. It describes only the surface geometry of the 3D object without
any representation of common CAD model attributes. STL format has both ASCII and binary
representations. It describes triangulated surface by the unit normal and vertices of the triangles.
CollabCAD supports parsing of both formats and it is represented visually in the form of
'cadmesh' entity.

Figure 12-1: Information about mesh after STL import

It is for visualization (wireframe, facet, facet with edges, zebra strip) purpose. Once user selects
the file (STL, st, stl) in file chooser and the STL data is processed, user is informed about of the
'cadmesh' entity in tabular form.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 176


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

12.1.3 IGES Post Processor


12.1.3.1 Introduction
The IGES establishes standards for the exchange of computer-aided design and manufacture
graphics data. The purpose of IGES is to transfer product definition data between different
CAD/CAM systems. The fundamental unit of information in a IGES file is an entity. The IGES file
hence defines the product data as a collection of entities. Each IGES entity is represented in a
neutral format, and corresponds to the same entity in native format of the source CAD/CAM
system

12.1.3.2 Processing the IGES information


The post-processor loads the IGES file to CollabCAD entities(curves/surfaces/brepshape). IGES
files up to and including IGES version 5.3 can be read. The translatable IGES entities are:
• Points
• Curves
• Surfaces
• B-Rep
Note:
• All non-millimetre length units are automatically converted to millimetres (the default
modelling system in CollabCAD, not supported for inch units used in CollabCAD). For e.g. an
IGES file created with 'inch' units of other CAD System will be automatically taken care by
the IGES post-processor.
• It is desirable to have IGES file of swap not less than 1 Gb.
• IGES Solids are not translatable. Solid models are translatable using the B-Rep option and
the 'faces' are mapped to CollabCAD 'freeform' surface instance. This can be 'stitched' to
create a CollabCAD 'freeform' solid or surface
When the user selects the IGES Post Processor menu item, a file chooser with additional panel
comes up. Once a user selects an igs/IGS/iges/IGES file, the Import option is enabled with check-
box options. Import option contains Points, Curves, Surfaces and B-Rep. If no option is selected,
a warning message dialog box pops up. Re-select the option for post-processing. If a user wants
to read IGES Points (if available) in the file, then enable 'Points'. If a user, enables 'B-Rep', other
options are disabled. To activate any of the other options, un-check the 'B-Rep' option.
If 'B-Rep' option selected then only Continuity (C0, C1, C2) option is enabled with combo box
options. The default Continuity is C0. This option manages the continuity of B-Spline curves (IGES
entities 106, 112 and 126) after translation to CollabCAD (CollabCAD requires that the curves in
a model be at least C1 continuous; no such requirement is made by IGES).
• C0: No change, the curves are taken as they are in the IGES file.
• C1: If an IGES B-Spline or Spline curve is C0 continuous, it is broken down into pieces of C1
continuous B-Spline Curves.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 177


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• C2: IGES Spline curves are broken down into pieces of C2 continuity. This parameter does
not change the continuity of curves that are used in the construction of IGES B-Rep entities.
Once the 'Read' button is pressed, a progress bar dialog is displayed. It shows the percentage
(based on number of entities/B-Rep) being processed. The following messages are echoed on the
console (from the underlying geometric kernel).
• Total number of loaded entities: 200.
• Info: ShapeProcess_Context: Reload Resource_Manager: -> IGES
Approach 1 (At Entity Level):
• In this case, post-processing provides the information about the entities required to build
the IGES file. It returns all geometric entities used in the IGES file.
• Enabling points or curves or surfaces are suitable for reading wireframe or surface model
IGES data.
Type IGES entity Type CollabCAD entity

100 Circular Arc 4 Circle/3-point arc

104 Conic Arc 6 Ellipse/Hyperbola/Parabola


• Form 1 for Ellipse
• Form 2 for Hyperbola
• Form 3 for Parabola
110 Line 3 Line

116 Point 1 Point

120 Surface of Revolution 48 Revolution of Surface

126 Rational B-Spline Curve 8 B-Spline Curve

510 Face 81 Freeform surface instance(unstitched)

Note: This table will be updated as and when more geometrical entities are mapped to CollabCAD
geometrical entities
Approach 2 (At B-Rep Shape Level):
In this case post-processor provides the information extracted from the B-Rep shapes inside the
IGES file. It reads all the B-Rep shapes from the IGES file. It does not consider the creation of the
shapes. It works only on the topology which is present in the IGES file. Post-processor reads the
B-Rep shapes in the IGES file, takes the count of it. Then it checks the type of each shape (e.g.
Vertex, Face, Edge, Solid or Compound etc.).
According to this topology type, the post-processor maps shape type to respective CollabCAD
entity type. e.g. In case of Face, it converts it into geometrical surface/freeform surface instance
and in case of Edge it converts it into CollabCAD Curve. For 'Solid', it is mapped to freeform solid
entity or for 'Compound' type, it maps the to a CollabCAD 'BREPShape' entity. For example, in

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 178


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

case of Trimmed surface it will create a BREPShape (B-Rep type is 'shell'). User can at any time
use the 'Explore' curves functionality to get the underlying editable geometrical curves. Clicking
the READ button, IGES entity data in the file is post-processed. Post-processed information’s are
displayed in a tabbed pane output.
The first tab "General" displays File Name, Start and End Time of the process, and the Tolerance
and Unit used in the IGES file

Figure 12-2: Post-processed information of BREPShape

The second tab "Input" displays total of IGES entities read by the post-processor. 'NotProcessed'
implies that the entity has been read but not mapped to CollabCAD entity.

Figure 12-3: Total of IGES entities read by the post-processor

The third tab "Output" displays the mapped CollabCAD entities. Then entities are created based
on the Import option checked by the use

12.1.4 OBJ Import


OBJ (or .OBJ) is a geometry definition file format developed by Wavefront Technologies for its
Advanced Visualizer animation package. It is an open format and is supported by many
software’s. The OBJ file format is a simple data-format that represents 3D geometry as, the

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 179


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

position of each vertex, the UV position of each texture coordinate vertex, vertex normals, and
the faces that make each polygon defined as a list of vertices, and texture vertices.
CollabCAD supports parsing of .obj file and it is represented visually in the form of 'cadmesh'
entity. It is for visualization (wireframe, facet, facet with edges, zebra strip) purpose. Once user
selects the file (obj, oj, OBJ) in file chooser and the OBJ data is processed, user is informed about
of the 'cadmesh' entity in tabular form.

Figure 12-4: Entity information after OBJ Import

12.2 Export
Option of exporting to STEP, IGES, VRML, BREP, STL, JSON and XML formats. When the user
chooses one of the formats from the export menu, the file chooser dialog will prompt the user to
select the directory and file name. The user can either export the whole part or else selected
entities. When the user repeats the operation the file chooser dialog will show the last visited
directory.
STL export supports creating STL files in ASCII and Binary format from CADSolid/CADSurface
entities. User can set the file type in Tools->Part Options -> Translators tab for getting the
required file type. Default is set to ASCII file. In the case of exporting a selected number of entities,
the user needs to select the entities by any of the available methods (mouse right click) such as
"Select by Layer", Region etc. After selecting the required entities, he must press enter. To select
all the entities, press Shift +B. A file chooser dialog prompts the user for the directory and file.
The user can also export a single entity(point/curve/surface/solid) to OpenCASCADE BREP
format (ASCII) file. This format is used for saving OpenCASCADE topological shapes. User invokes
by choosing File -> Export -> BREP. A file chooser prompts to select the directory in which the
BREP(*.brep) file is created. User can also export CADSolid/CADSurface to JSON format that can
be visualize in CollabCAD 3D Viewer

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 180


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 13. Scripting Interface

13.1 Jython Basics


13.1.1 About Jython
Jython is an implementation of the Python language for the Java platform. The Java platform is
an asset to the Jython language which allows it to run anywhere with a JVM and gives lots of
flexibility. It also offers a vast library containing thousands of APIs that are available for use by
Jython. Using Jython, user can write Python programs that interact with any Java code. Unlike the
Java programming language, Jython is a scripting language, does not require a compilation step
and supports interactive execution.

13.1.2 Installing and Configuring Jython


Jython is distributed as a self-extracting .class file. User can get Jython at http://www.jython.org.
CollabCAD uses 2.1 version. To install Jython, open the command line to the directory in which
user has placed the jython-21.class file and then type:

jython-21

To execute the file any of the following command can be used, depending on the system. Be sure
not to put ".class" at the end of the file name.

java jython-21

jre jython-21

jview jython-21

It can be necessary to set the CLASSPATH to include the current directory.

13.1.3 Identifiers
All data and code is seen as an object. An identifier is a name that is used to identify an object.
The language treats the variable name as a label that points to a value.
A variable is untyped and can take any value. Example:

x = 100

x = 'Hello'

In the above example, variable 'x' can take any type of value. It also supports multiple assignment.
Example:

>>> x, y, z = 100, 200, 300

>>> print x

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 181


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
100

>>> print y

200

Jython supports only one null value, with the reserved name of 'None'. Jython has not separate
boolean type. For numeric types, zero is considered to be false and all other values true. For
structured types (that is, sequences and maps), an empty structure is considered to be false and
others true. The None value is always false.

13.1.4 Coding Structure


It uses indentation rather than punctuation to define the structure of code. As long as the first
line of a code block is out-dented by at least one space, the rest of the block can maintain a
consistent indentation, which makes code easy to read. Example:

x = 100

if x > 0:

print 'Its greater than 100'

else:

print 'Its less than 100'

13.1.5 Operators
The operators that are used by Jython are very similar to those used in other languages.
Operators such as +, -, *, and /, are available for performing calculations. Several statements can
be written on the same line when they are separated by semicolon (;). Other operators are listed
below:

Operator Description Example Output


+ Addition 5+2 7

- Subtraction 5-2 3

* Multiplication 5*2 10

/ Division 5/2 2.50

// Truncating Division 5/2 2

% Modulo (Remainder of Division) 5/2 1

** Power Operator 5 ** 2 25

+var Unary Plus x = 5; +x 6

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 182


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

-var Unary Minus x = 5; -x 4

var1 or var2 Logical OR x = true ; y = false ; x true


or y

var1 and var2 Logical AND x = true ; y = false ; x false


and y

not var Logical NOT x = true; not x false

x==y x<>y Comparison operators(equal, not equal, greater x = 5; y = 10; x > y false
than, less than)
x!=y x>y
x<y x<=y x>=y

Figure 13-1: List of operators in Jython

13.1.6 Strings
A string is a sequence of characters, which is immutable. An immutable object is one that cannot
be changed after it is created. However, there are quite a few string methods that can be used to
manipulate the contents of a particular string. Actually they never manipulate the contents
though, these methods return a manipulated copy of the string. The original string is left
unchanged.
Example:

temp_string = 'welcome to the world of jython'

>>>temp_string.capatalize()

'Welcome to the world of jython'

>>>temp_string.count('w')

13.1.7 Functions
Functions are named portions of code that usually perform one or more tasks and return a value.
In order to define a function, use the 'def' statement.
Functions can accept parameters, or other program variables, that can be used within the context
of the function to perform some task and return a value.
Syntax:

def <function name> ([parmeter1], [parameter2], ..):

Example:

def muntiply_nums (x, y):

return x*y

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 183


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

13.1.8 Classes
Classes are defined using the 'class' keyword. Classes can contain functions, methods, and
variables. Methods are just like functions in that the 'def' keyword is used to create them, and
they accept parameters. The only difference is that methods take a parameter known as 'self' that
refers to the object to which the method belongs. Classes contain what is known as an initializer
method, and it is called automatically when a class is instantiated.
Example:

class emp_class:

def __init__(self, name, empCode):

self.name = name

self.empCode = empCode

def showemp(self):

print 'Name : %s ; Emp Code: %d' %(self.name, self.empCode)

>>>emp1 = emp_class('John', 1)

>>> emp1.showemp()

Name : John ; Emp Code: 1

13.1.9 Statements
13.1.9.1 if-elif-else statement
The if statement simply performs an evaluation on an expression and does different things
depending on whether it is 'True' or 'False'. If the expression evaluates to 'True' then one set of
statements will be executed, and if it evaluates to 'False' a different set of statements will be
executed.
Syntax:

if <an expression to test>:

perform an action

else:

perform a different action

Example:

x = 3

y = 2

if x == y:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 184


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
print 'x is equal to y'

elif x > y:

print 'x is greater than y'

else:

print 'x is less than y'

Output: x is greater than y

13.1.9.2 print Statement


The 'print' statement is used to display program output onto the screen. It can be used for
displaying messages, which are printed from within a program, and also for printing values,
which may have been calculated.

print 'Hello'

my_value = 'Jython'

print my_value

There are some formatting operators that can be used with print statement.
- %s String
- %d - Decimal
- %f - Float

num = 10

pi = 3.14159

name = 'John'

print 'Decimal value is %d , Flot value is = %f, String is %s' % (num,


pi, name)

Output:

Decimal value is 10 , Flot value is = 3.14159, String is John

13.1.9.3 try-except-finally
The 'try-except-finally' is the supported method for performing error handling. When we try to
run a piece of code and if it fails then it is caught, and the error is handled in a proper fashion. If
there is an exception that is caught within the block of code and there is a need to perform some
cleanup tasks, the cleanup code is placed within the final clause of the block. All code within the
'finally' clause is always invoked before the exception is raised.

x = 9

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 185


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
y = 0

try:

print 'Dividing numbers x and y : %d %d %f' % (x, y, (x/y))

except:

print 'Divide by zero error'

Output:

Divide by zero error

13.1.9.4 raise
The 'raise' statement is used to throw or raise an exception. Place a 'raise' statement anywhere
where user wish to raise a specified exception. Specify message within a raise can be given by
raising a generic Exception, and then specifying message on the statement as follows.

>>> raise Exception('Custom Exception')

13.1.9.5 import
The 'import' statement brings external modules or code into a program so that it can be used.
This statement is ultimately responsible for reuse of code in multiple locations.
If a class is stored in an external module that is named the same as the class itself, the 'import'
statement can be used to explicitly bring that class into an application. Specific identifier from
another module can also be imported.

# Import a module Point3d from javax.vecmath aliased as P3d

import javax.vecmath.Point3d as P3d

This can also be written as:

# Import Point3d module from javax.vecmath

from javax.vecmath import Point3d

Another Example:

from incad.scripting import ScriptingInterface

13.1.10 Iteration
13.1.10.1 While Loop
The 'while' loop construct is used in order to iterate through code based upon a provided
conditional statement. If the condition is true, then the loop will continue to process. Once the
condition evaluates to false, the looping ends. The pseudocode is as follows:

while True

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 186


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
perform operation

The loop begins with the declaration of the 'while' and conditional expression, and it ends once
the conditional has been met and the expression is True. The expression is checked at the
beginning of each looping sequence, so normally some value that is contained within the
expression is changed within the suite of statements inside the loop. Eventually the value is
changed in such a way that it makes the expression evaluate to False, otherwise an infinite loop
would occur.
Example:

x = 5

y = 2

while y < x:

print 'y is %d less than x' % (x-y)

y += 1

Output:

y is 3 less than x

y is 2 less than x

y is 1 less than x

13.1.10.2 for Loop


A 'for' loop is used to iterate through a defined set of values. The pseudocode is as follows:

for each value in this defined set:

perform suite of operations

Example:

for x in range(5):

print x

Output:

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 187


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

A range is a built-in function for Python which simply provides a range from one value to another.

13.1.11 Documenting Code


Symbol # is used to comment a single line. All text on the same line after the # is ignored. Multi-
line comment is being provided using the triple-quote (''') designation at the beginning and end
of a comment.
Example:

#This is single line comment

'''This function compute distance between

two points. Result will be returned to

the calling functions

This is multi line documentation.'''

13.1.12 Lists
There are number of containers for storing and manipulating data within an application. Lists
can be used to store data of different types. This means that a list can be used to store any Python
data type (heterogeneous), and these types can be mixed within a single list.The list can be
constructed and modified as the application runs(mutable), they are not declared with a static
length. They are easy to traverse through the usage of loops, and indexes can also be used for
positional placement or removal of particular items in the list.

#Define an empty list

my_list = []

#Single Item List

my_list = [1]

#Define a list containing multiple data types

multi_list = [1, 2, 'three', 4, 'five', 'six']

#Define a list containing other lists

my_new_list = ['one', old_list, [1, 2, 3, 4], 'two']

The index can be used to insert or remove items from a particular position. Some functions of list
are listed below:

Functions Description
append(x) To add an item to the end of a list

index(x) Seeks the index x

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 188


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

reverse() Reverses the list

insert(i, x) Insert x at index i

remove(x) Delete the first occurrence of x in the list

pop([i]) Deletes and return the last element in the list or element at index i

13.1.13 Tuples
Tuples are much like lists; however, they are immutable. Once a tuple has been defined, it cannot
be changed. They contain indexes just like lists, but again, they cannot be altered once defined.
Therefore, the index in a tuple may be used to retrieve a particular value and not to assign or
modify. Because they are immutable, their size does not grow once they have been defined, so
tuples can also play an important role when memory allocation is a concern.

# Creating an empty tuple

>>> myTuple = ()

# Creating tuples and using them

>>> myTuple2 = (1, 'two',3, 'four')

>>> myTuple2

(1, 'two', 3, 'four')

13.1.14 Jython-specific Collections


There are a number of Jython-specific collection objects that are available for use. Most of these
collection objects are used to pass data into Java classes and so forth, they add additional
functionality into the Jython implementation. For instance, a Java ArrayList can be imported in
Jython and then used as if it were part of the language. it is possible to use a Java ArrayList in
Jython and use methods such as add(), remove(), and get().

# Import and use a Java ArrayList

>>> import java.util.ArrayList as ArrayList

>>> arr = ArrayList()

# Add method will add an element to the list and return a

# boolean to signify successful addition

>>> arr.add(1)

True

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 189


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
>>> arr.add(2)

True

>>> print arr

[1, 2]

13.1.15 Modules
Breaking of code into parts known as Modules helps to organize the large code bases. Modules
are helpful for creating libraries that can be imported and used in different applications that
share some functionality. Some of the most commonly modules are:
• sys module containing methods: argv, exit, stdin, version
• os module containing methods: system, wait, kill
• math module containing methods: acos, asin, pi, sqrt, floor
• time module containing methods: localtime, sleep, time, daylight

13.1.16 Scripting with Jython


Scripting is writing a small program to do a particular task. An example to write a simple script
is as follows:

import sys

for arg in sys.argv:

print arg

Execution:

$ jython args.py 1 2 3 4

Output:

args.py

The above script take input from the command line. The first argument in sys.argv is the script
name (args.py) and rest of the elements(values) are passed after that.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 190


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

13.2 CollabCAD with Jython Scripting


Jython scripting is being used to interact with CollabCAD Java application. CollabCAD has
interactive creation, modification and deletion of geometry entities (objects). Jython scripting
allows user to create, edit, modify CollabCAD entities. It provides user a quick way to check
different functionalities available in CollabCAD by knowing a bit of Jython programming

13.2.1 Jython Interpreter


CollabCAD provides Jython Interpreter as a console panel and a separate Jython console frame
where user can interactively use Jython expressions, system installed Jython modules as well as
CollabCAD scripting methods.

Figure 13-2: CollabCAD Jython Interpreter

Users can program their own scripts and can also execute those scripts directly in CollabCAD
using menu option: Tools->Execute Script. This will create objects directly on CollabCAD canvas.
Some example scripts are available with CollabCAD for better understanding.

13.2.2 Scripting Interface


Scripting Interface API provides direct access to Java objects from Jython to perform various
operations. There are different methods to create all supported entities including editing and
view related operations. Some of the operations available are listed below:
• Point creation
• Curves creation: Line, Arc, Ellipse, Parabola, Hyprerbola, Helix, Spiral, Involute, Bezier, B-
Spline, Profile.
• Surface creation: Plane, Cylindrical, Conical, Spherical, Toridal, Revolution, Extrusion, Bezier,
B-Spline, Freeform, Pipe, etc.
• Solid creation: Box, Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, Torus, Pyramid, Slab, Coil, Revolution, Sweep,
Loft, etc.
• Other operations: Translate, Rotate, Mirror, Offset, Exploring Surfaces/Curves,
Blend/Fillet/Chamfer, Split etc.
• Solid Boolean and Feature: Fuse/cut/intersect, Hole, Revolve, Rib, Pattern, etc.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 191


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• GUI functions: Colour setting, shading(facets), View selection, Message dialog, etc.
• Workspace creation
• Analysis operations: Length/ Area calculation, Radius of curvature, Surface bounds etc.
• Dimensioning: Horizontal, Vertical, Parallel, Liner, Adding label/ notes etc.
Detailed list of all operations/functions and their description are available in user manual of
CollabCAD.

13.2.2.1 Instance Formation


In order to access Java objects and methods from Jython through Scripting Interface, user have
to create an instance of Incad class.
Using this instance, different methods of scripting interface can be accessed. An example below
shows an instance creation steps:

#Import Incad class and refer to it using an identifier 'incad' in the


script

import incad.Incad as incad

#Create an instance of 'Incad' to expose its method

theApp = incad.getScriptingInstance()

13.2.2.2 Point Creation


In order to create a point, user have to import Point3d class of Java3d. An example below shows
point creation steps:

#Point Creation using an object of Incad class. this will give CADPoint

p1 = theApp.addPoint(200,200,55)

#Import Point3d class ( Java3D object)

import javax.vecmath.Point3d as P3d

#Create Point3d objects

p2 = P3d(100,100,-50)

13.2.2.3 Curve Creation


Examples below shows different type of curve creation:

#Create three points for creating a CollabCAD CADArc

p3 = theApp.addPoint(97, -31, 0.0)

p4 = theApp.addPoint(104.0, 22.0, 0.0)

p5 = theApp.addPoint(126.0, 0.0, 0.0)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 192


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
p6 = theApp.addPoint(104.0, -22.0, 0.0)

#Create an arc

ar2 = theApp.addArc(p4, p5, p6)

#Create a Line

ln1 = theApp.addLine(p4, p5)

#Create an ellipse using center point, major/minor axis, start/end angle,


rotation angle, current view number

theApp.addEllipse(164.0,78.0,0.0,54.0,20.0,0.0,360.0,45.0,0)

13.2.2.4 Surface Creation

Examples below shows different type of surface creation:

#creating a CollabCAD Plane by 3 corner points on the plane (218,156,0)


(209,132,0) (245,135,0)

theApp.addPlane(218,156,0,209,132,0,245,135,0)

#creating a Cylindrical Surface

startp = theApp.addPoint(100.0,0.0,0.0)

endp = theApp.addPoint(100.0,100.0,0.0)

radius = 10

theApp.addCylinderSurf(startp, endp,radius)

13.2.2.5 Solid Creation


Examples below shows different type of solid creation:

#Create a CollabCAD SolidBox entity by calling the method using two corner
points

box1 = theApp.addBox(p1,p2)

# Creating Solid Cone using two Point3d objects and top,base radii

p1 = P3d(100.0,0.0,0.0)

p2 = P3d(100.0,100.0,0.0)

radius = 10

radius2 = 40

cone=theApp.addCone(p1, p2,radius, radius2)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 193


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

13.2.2.6 Other Operations


Examples below shows different operations of CollabCAD:

#Creating 2d fillet

origin = theApp.addPoint(0.0, 0.0, 0.0)

pnt1 = theApp.addPoint(100.0, 0.0, 0.0)

pnt2 = theApp.addPoint(0.0, 100.0, 0.0)

pnt3 = theApp.addPoint(100.0, 100.0, 0.0)

line1 = theApp.addLine(origin, pnt1)

line2 = theApp.addLine(origin, pnt2)

line3 = theApp.addLine(pnt2, pnt3)

curvearr = [line1, line2, line3]

theApp.add2DFillet (curvearr, 20)

13.2.2.7 Feature Based Operations


Examples below shows a solid revolve feature cut operation:

p1 = Point3d(0,0,0)

p2 = Point3d(100,0,0)

p3 = Point3d(100,100,0)

p4 = Point3d(0,100,0)

# Curves for the slab

cr1 = theApp.addLine(p1,p2)

cr2 = theApp.addLine(p2,p3)

cr3 = theApp.addLine(p3,p4)

cr4 = theApp.addLine(p4,p1)

#curv1 is the array of curves

curv1 = [cr1,cr2,cr3,cr4]

cadent1 = theApp.addSlab(4,curv1,100)

#Setting Iso View

theApp.setSingleView(3)

pt = Point3d(50.0,35.0,0.0)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 194


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
p5 = Point3d(35.0,35.0,0)

p6 = Point3d(50.0,35.0,0)

p7 = Point3d(50.0,50.0,0)

p8 = Point3d(35.0,50.0,0)

# Curves for the profile

c1 = theApp.addLine(p5,p6)

c2 = theApp.addLine(p6,p7)

c3 = theApp.addLine(p7,p8)

c4 = theApp.addLine(p8,p5)

prof = [c1,c2,c3,c4]

cadent2 = theApp.addSolidRevolveFeature(cadent1,pt,prof,p2,p3,360.0,0)

13.2.2.8 GUI Functions


Examples below shows different operations of CollabCAD:

# set name to the entity

name = 'offset1'

theApp.setName(entity1, name);

#set colour of an entity

theApp.setColour(o1,255,0,0)

13.2.2.9 Work Space Creation


An example below shows steps involved in workspace creation:

pnt1 = P3d(-99,24,0.0)

pnt2 = P3d(99,24,0.0)

pnt3 = P3d(0.0,50,0.0)

pnt4 = P3d(6,30,0.0)

# Variable uesd for defining the name of a workspace

name = "collabCADWsp"

# Method called for creating workspace

theApp.createWorkSpace(pnt1, pnt2, pnt3, pnt4, name)

13.2.2.10 Analysis Operations

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 195


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Examples below shows different analysis operations of CollabCAD:

#Computing area of an CollabCAD entity

area= theApp.area(cone)

print area

#Computing Distance between tow CollabCAD Points

dist = theApp.computeDistance(pnt1, pnt2)

print dist

13.2.2.11 Dimensioning
Examples below shows different dimensioning options of CollabCAD:

#For Horizontal Dimensioning theApp.addHorDimen(p1,p2,p3,1,0)

13.2.3 Using Java


Use of Java from withing Jython application programs is accessible by importing the required
classes and use them directly withing a Jython script. User can invoke a class method and pass
the parameters too.

#using Math classes and methods

from java.lang import Math

Math.max(6,12)

12L

Math.pow(2,3)

8.0

Math.round(10.766)

11L

from java.lang import System as javasys

javasys.out.println("Hello using Java in Jython")

Hello using Java in Jython

13.2.4 Using Swing


Swing is the Graphical User Interface(GUI) that is provided along with Jython. Below are some
examples reflecting use of swing in Jython:
A simple frame with a title

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 196


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool
from javax.swing import JFrame

f = JFrame('Hello, World!')

f.defaultCloseOperation = JFrame.EXIT_ON_CLOSE

f.size = (300, 300)

f.locationRelativeTo = None

f.visible = True

Using JOptionPane

from javax.swing import JPanel

from javax.swing import JOptionPane

jPan = JPanel()

JOptionPane.showMessageDialog(jPan, "Hello World", "Welcome",


JOptionPane.PLAIN_MESSAGE)

13.3 Component Library


CollabCAD provides the Component Library Framework. User can use Jython Scripting to create
new, modify components. These components can be used any number of times. A component
library is distributed with CollabCAD release with examples/ tool library with some component
like, fasteners, washers etc. User can directly use them.
Under component library menu there are four submenus:

13.3.1 Create
This option is to create component library. For creating a component, user writes a script or use
STEP file for creating a component. There are different ways to create a component library: With
Table, Without Table and using STEP file.
For creating component library using with and without table option user requires a script file for
component creation. The user (creator of component library) have to keep some points in mind.
While adding a script to the tool library, the field names in the table that the creator will use
correspond to the parametric variables in the script to be added to the database. Thus, during
creation of a script the creator should use meaningful names for the parametric variables. On
execution, a parametric script will pick up data from the table and no longer prompt the user
with a description of the parameter. The first table row indicating the parameters are to work as
a guide to the user of the script as to what each column represents. Example: Use "diameter" or
"dia" instead of "d1" to represent diameter.
During creation of a script the creator should not use any variable/parameter in uppercase. If a
script has two parameter "dia" and "DIA" or "Dia" during creation of the table for this script,

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 197


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

postgresql cannot distinguish between "dia" and "DIA" or "Dia". (Postgresql cannot create table
with separate fields "dia" and "DIA" or "Dia" as these means the same as field "dia" to it).
For creating component library using STEP option, user will provide a STEP file and store any
STEP component to be used as a standard part from the component library.

13.3.2 Use
This option is for using component from component library. For tabular components, user can
select a row form the parameter table and can use the desired component. In components
without table, there is no parametric table attached to the components, so the component will be
loaded directly on the CollabCAD 3D Canvas. User can also use STEP component, that will also be
loaded directly on the CollabCAD 3D Canvas.

13.3.3 Modify
User can modify component from component library. Components in component library with
tables can be modified by editing parameters or adding/deleting/editing rows. Users can even
replace scripts and image. Users can delete or rename components in component library
without tables and STEP. As no table is attached to these components so there is no further
modification possible in without table and STEP components.

13.3.4 Database
User can create and use component from component library using database. Under this option
CollabCAD supports Standard and Tool Libraries

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 198


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 14. About CollabCAD 3D Web Viewer


e-CollabCAD Web Viewer is a product for visualization and sharing of 3D design data of
CollabCAD and open 3D data file formats (STL, OBJ, PLY, MUZ, JSON). No software or plug-in
required. The viewer works directly on a WebGL compliant web browser. User can easily Upload,
View and Share 3D models and innovative designs with public or private collaborative partners.
With the help of WebGL based CollabCAD 3D viewer, user can visualize in real time the 3D models
in their browser. CollabCAD viewer works on all browsers that supports WebGL. 3D models are
rendered with the help of WebGL and HTML5.

14.1 Account Creation


CollabCAD offers account creation. Once user register successfully on CollabCAD, user will only
need to verify email by the process of account activation and can freely avail the functionalities
of our 3D viewer.

14.2 File Upload/ Share/ View


14.2.1 Upload
After creating account over CollabCAD, one can deployed 3D model in faster manner. Once model
is uploaded into account, it reflects can be viewed instantly.
User can upload open data format (STL, OBJ, JSON, DAE, WRL, PLY) data files of their 3D model
in CollabCAD account.
A notification mail will send to registered email address of the user to notify that user has
successfully uploaded a 3D model. Account usage limit for each user is 100 MB and a user can
upload a 3D model (file) of maximum of 8 MB.
At a time, user can list 5, 10, 15, 20 and all models as per display option set by the user. Search
facility is also available to the user to search a model.
User can update details related to the uploaded model such as model name, tag and description.
Moreover, user can update the image of model. Image can be browsed and selected by the user.
After updating the model details, its image is reflected in the library if the model is shared by the
user.
While filling the update form, proper error messages and help box are provided to support user
for providing valid data.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 199


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 14-1: Interface for file uploading

Figure 14-2: Updating uploaded model information

14.2.2 Share
e-CollabCAD facilitate easy sharing of uploaded 3D models. Users can instantly and easily share
their models in the public domain.
Shared model will be available in public library for all users. Anyone can view the shared
(published) model from library.
User can also have privilege to un-publish an already published model accordingly.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 200


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 14-3: Public Library Interface

14.2.3 View
Models that user uploaded in his account can be viewed with the help of WebGL supported
browser. A WebGL enabled browser alone can able to view 3D models.
However, the level of support and the expected performance varies between different browsers.
In modern browsers like Google Chrome 56 and higher, Mozilla Firefox 51 and higher, Safari 8
and higher, MS Edge 14, Internet Explorer 11 , WebGL is enabled by default.

Figure 14-4: CollabCAD 3D Viewer

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 201


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 15. Features of 3D Viewer

15.1 Introduction
3D CollabCAD viewer comprise of various features as it incorporate with model tree which
provides the information regarding geometry, vertices, faces and other additional information
for users to view and examine 3D CAD and mesh model methodically in detail.
It owns with functionalities like one can change shading quality, background colour, material
colour with the uploaded models as well as with our provide basic primitives.
With these uncounted features one can view and observe the face normals, vertices normals and
visual structure of uploaded 3D object.
e-CollabCAD web application yield lots of features that make easy deployment of 3D CAD and
mesh models, share and view them in WebGL enabled modern web browsers. 3D models are
rendered on the 3D web viewer with the help of WebGL and HTML5.
e-CollabCAD gives the flexibility to access CAD data anytime, anywhere on any device. We offer
fully cloud based portal so user can utilize all features and functionalities of e-CollabCAD over
any device, irrespective of user's location.
If web browser of device supports WebGL then user can access 3D viewer any time as CollabCAD
viewer works on all browsers that supports WebGL. 3D models are rendered with the help of
WebGL and HTML5.

15.2 Model Tree


Tree panel contains a variety of information about geometries
and file information. It is located at the left side of the drawing
canvas and can be opened/closed using the menu item
provided for this purpose on the top left corner of the viewer.
• Geometry – It shows all the geometries names which are
loaded or created in 3D Viewer.
• Options for hiding/deleting meshes are there for better
investigation of the uploaded model.
• Information – It shows the file name, type of the file,
number of objects loaded, number of vertices and faces in
the loaded objects from the file, and size of the loaded
objects, and shading of material which is applied on the
geometry.

15.3 View Figure 15-1: Model Tree

• Top – Its viewing plane will be Z-X Plane. Bottom – Its working plane will be X-Z Plane.
• Left – Its viewing plane will be Z-Y Plane. Right – Its working plane will be Z-Y Plane.
• Front – Its viewing plane will be X-Y Plane. Back – Its working plane will be X-Y Plane.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 202


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Isometric – It will change the view to the isometric view and viewing plane will be the plane
in which X, Y, Z will make equal angles.
• Auto fit – This option scales the view such that all the entities on the scene will be fit within
the view.

Figure 15-2: View Options and View Box

15.4 Primitives
• User can create the primitive like box, cylinder, cone, sphere, and torus.
• When any of the option is clicked one dialogue box will appear asking for the dimension of
the primitive and origin for the primitive to be created.
• The dialogue box won’t disappear, and user can create another entity or press cancel button
to disappear the dialogue box.
• User can create many primitives over canvas as well as with uploaded model.

15.5 Shading
• Smooth – It uses linear interpolation of either colours or normals between vertices.
• Flat – It will apply the same colour for every pixel in a face.
• Glossy – Glossy refers to the ability of a material to reflect light in the specular direction.
• Wire mesh – This option will show wireframe of all the models.
• Textured – In this a texture will be applied to the geometry.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 203


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 15-3: Types of shading

15.6 Geometry Setting


• Shading Quality – It will affect the quality of the primitives rough to refined according to
the slider value.
• Show Bounding Box – It will show one bounding box covering all the geometries added into
the scene.
• Show Bounding Sphere – It will show one bounding sphere covering all the geometries
added into the scene.
• Show Face Normals – It will show the face normals of all the geometries added in the scene.
• Show Vertex Normals – It will show the vertex normals of all the geometries added in the
scene.

15.7 General Setting


• Show Stats – It will show the stats at the bottom center of the page.
➢ FPS - Frames rendered in the last second.
➢ MS - Milliseconds needed to render a frame.
➢ MB - MBytes of allocated memory.
• Show Global Axes – It will show the global Axes on the canvas at position (0,0,0).
• Show Grid – It will show the grid in X-Z plane.
• Animation – It will give a default rotation around the Y- Axis when start will be selected.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 204


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

15.8 Light Settings


15.8.1 Light Options
• Ambient Light -This light globally illuminates all objects in the scene equally. It has no
specific direction or position (source).
• Point Light- A point light is similar to a light bulb or a candle which emits light in all direction
from a source (position). The light intensity decreases with the distance from the source.
• Directional Light- A directional Light source approximates a very distant source of light. It
provides light only in one direction.
• Shadow Light - A Directional Light, which can be used to cast shadow. Light position can be
changed to see the effect on shadow from different directions.

15.8.2 Light Helpers


• Show Helper – Light helper will be shown with the same colour as the corresponding light
at the position of the corresponding light.
• Position – It will update the position of the corresponding light. Controls are provided as
text box for x, y and z direction.
• Intensity – It will change the intensity of the light (0 till 1).
• Colour – It will change the colour of the light.

15.9 Camera Setting


Type of camera can be switched to perspective or orthographic.
• Perspective Camera – This projection mode is used to visualize the models to mimic the
way the human eye sees. It is real virtualization.
• Orthographic Camera – In this projection mode, an object's size in the rendered image stays
constant regardless of its distance from the camera. It is virtual visualization (not real) as it
shows the objects (two objects of same length) with the same length instead having at
different depths.

Figure 15-4: Effects of orthographic camera and perspective camera

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 205


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

15.10 3D Environment
An option (Options >> Colour Setting Tab >> 3D Environment) is provided to the user to add 3D
environment scene /background. Cube mapping technique is used to implement 3D
Environment Background. In this technique an imaginary cube is created with six textures, one
texture for each one of the cube's face.
An environment map is typically a texture or set of textures that contains an image of the scene
surrounding a given object. This object can be reflective or refractive.
• Reflection mapping occurs when light bounces off of a reflective surface.
• Refraction mapping occurs when light passes through the object.
Cube map is used for creating 3D Environment Map. A Cube map is a panoramic view of a scene
that has been mapped inside the cube.

Figure 15-5: 3D Environment Mapping (Reflection and Refraction)

15.11 Mesh Clipping


This operation will clip out the model or mesh according to selected options like distance, view
direction and plane.
• Distance- The value of distance is entered to decide the position of clipping plane. Generally,
this distance is measured from the origin (0, 0, 0).
• View direction- View direction will be selected to view the clipped mesh. This may be either
positive direction or may be negative direction.
• Plane- A plane should be selected to clip the mesh in that particular plane. For example, XY
plane, YZ plane, ZX plane.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 206


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 15-6: Mesh Clipping

15.12 Translate/Rotate
These functionalities are very useful for clear perception of 3D model as a small translate/rotate
can make 3D model more observable.
• Translate- Easy translate of 3D model by providing x, y, z coordinates.
• Rotate- 3D model can be smoothly rotate by providing x, y, z value in degree.
Note: Rotate and translate need at least one value from x, y, z.

15.13 Metal Material


This is wonderful option provided for realistic observation of 3D model.
Having large number of metal material like iron, gold, silver, gemstone, copper etc.

15.14 Theme Customization


Various themes options are available to make over the interface of viewer.

15.15 Other Features


• Shortcut toolbar consists of various operations and functionalities.
• Screenshot, Auto fit, Full screen, reset settings buttons are provided.
• User information tooltip is available at top right corner of viewer.
• Easy responsiveness make viewer more usable, simple and serviceable.
• Colour sliders along with colour pickers are available for very easy colour selection for
geometry and background.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 207


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 16. CollabCAD Desktop and Web Help

16.1 Desktop Help


16.1.1 Java Help
It provides a context-sensitive help system based on JavaHelpTM using an independent viewer.
It has three panes,
Toolbar: A bar over the navigation and content panes to display various toolbar buttons, such
as Back, Forward, and Print
Navigation: A tabbed interface appearing on the left that allows users to switch between the
table of contents, index, and full text search displays. Additional navigators like Glossary (short
technical descriptions of terms) and Favorites ( display of the user's favourite topics).
Content pane: A pane on the right that displays help topics formatted with HTML.
Help can also be invoked when a user chooses an operation (GUI) and presses F1 key. It can also
be invoked using the? button on dialog's used for GUI inputs. Help window will also close on
closing of dialog box. By F1 key or ? button on dialog's , help corresponding to current operation
will be invoked.

16.1.2 User Manual


With this choice, CollabCAD user manual will be invoked in the browser (like Netscape or IE). To
invoke user manual, click on "User Manual" menu.
NOTE: If the browser is not installed in the machine then you may not able to invoke User Manual.
User has to specify the path of Browser executable file in collabcad_client.properties
file for Linux Operating System as shown below.
ccadcli.UNIX_BROWSER=/usr/bin/mozilla

16.1.3 Tutorial
With this choice, CollabCAD tutorial will be invoked by the browser (like Netscape or IE). To
invoke tutorial section, click on "Tutorial" menu.

16.2 CollabCAD Web Help


CollabCAD online help is also available. User may access CollabCAD web help by following the
link (https://collabcad.gov.in/CollabCADHelp/index.jsp).
CollabCAD Help of different versions is available on the Web help portal. Currently help of
CollabCAD CBSE Version, CollabCAD 2.3.0 and CollabCAD ATL version is available on web portal.
Separate help for plot configurator of different versions is also available. Below is the image of
Web Help interface.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 208


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 16-1: CollabCAD Web Help

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 209


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Section 2
Tutorials

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 210


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 17. 3D Modeling Example: Machine Block Part

17.1 Introduction
Machine Block example has a basic model design that is designed using CollabCAD 2.5.0
Windows version. This example is a good exposure for CAD beginner. User can follow the steps
to create machine block. This model is quite simple and compressive to learn 3D modeling and
detailing in CollabCAD.

17.2 Modeling Steps


17.2.1 Step 1
Open CollabCAD and setting design variables.
Start CollabCAD in Standalone mode. This will open
CollabCAD application window.
• Go to File >> New >> Part design >> OK
• Give desired name to the new part, say MachineBlock
Figure 17-1: Setting design variables
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
After this, the User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree and Tool palette will be
visible.

Figure 17-2: CollabCAD Workspace

17.2.2 Step 2
Set the work plane and view
• Select View >> Front or press CTRL+F

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 211


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit in the screen. X-Y coordinate system marker will be
visible in the center.

Figure 17-3: Front View

17.2.3 Step 3
Create profile curves.
• Draw a line using menu option: Basic >> Line >> Screen Position
• Right click in workspace, select Workspace Origin
Note: Pressing keyboard “I” Enable / Disable Implicit selection
About Implicit selection mode (“I”)
Through this mode, users can select implicitly existing points like end points of curves,
vertices of surfaces and solid. This method can be invoked by pressing the “I” Key or by
clicking the corresponding Tool Bar icon. During implicit selection mode, the cursor would
change to Arrow Cursor, and the Tool Bar icon would change the color. When the mouse is
moved in Implicit selection mode, the nearest focal point of the nearby entity would be
highlighted. User can now select the desired point by simply pressing the left mouse button.
This mode can be revoked by again pressing the “I” Key or by clicking the Tool Bar icon once
again.
Ensure that implicit mode is off/disabled before executing next
step.
About T press (“T”)
Keyboard ‘T' press is used to input Delta values for line creation.
• Now press keyboard 'T' to input Delta values in line creation
dialog and click OK
Figure 17-4: Line Creation
X = 0, Y = 65, Z = 0 dialog box
• Again, press keyboard “T” to input Delta values in line creation
dialog and Click OK

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 212


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

X = 15, Y = 0, Z = 0
• Repeat the above operation with following values
X = 0, Y = -15, Z=0
X = 30, Y = 0, Z = 0
X = 0, Y = 15, Z = 0
X = 15, Y = 0, Z = 0
X = 0, Y = -65, Z = 0
X = -60, Y = 0, Z = 0
• Press Enter to complete the operation Figure 17-5: Profile curves

17.2.4 Step 4
As the profile with curves is complete, now build a Solid entity from profile curves.
Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid’s menu
• Create a solid on the profile curves using menu
option: Solid >> Slab
• System will prompt to select the set of curves
(profile)
• Right click the mouse button and choose chain
selection from the list to select set of continuous
curves automatically.
• In case, any curve is left in the loop/chain, use left
mouse click on the curve to select it. Figure 17-6: Solid Slab

• Now Slab creation options dialog will open, select


“One Direction”, Thickness1 =20, and check ‘Reverse Direction’ option, then click OK or
hit Enter to complete the operation.
It will create a solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree.

17.2.5 Step 5
Create another set of Profile curve
• User may blank/hide existing entities on the canvas
before making new profile(optional)
• Draw a 2D profile by joining of lines.
• Go to Basic >> Line >> Screen Position
Note: Implicit mode should be off
• Right click in workspace, select Workspace Origin
• Then press keyboard “T” input Delta values in line Figure 17-7: Profile curves
creation dialog and click OK

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 213


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

X = 0, Y = 43, Z = 0
• Repeat the above step for the following Points
X = 60, Y = 0, Z = 0
X = 0, Y = -43, Z = 0
X = -60, Y = 0, Z = 0
• Press Enter to complete operation

17.2.6 Step 6
As the profile with curves is complete, now build a Solid.
• Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid’s
menu: Solid >> Slab
• System prompts to select the set of curves
(profile)
• Right click the mouse button and choose
chain selection from the list to select set of
continuous curves automatically.
• In case, any curve is left in the loop/chain, use
left mouse click on the curve to select it.
• Now Slab creation options dialog will open,
select “One Direction”, Thickness1 =22, and
click OK or hit Enter to complete the Figure 17-8: Solid Slab
operation.
It will create a solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree.

17.2.7 Step 7
Set the work plane in which to create 2D sketch or profile (set of curves)
Select right view as working plane View >> Right or press CTRL + R

17.2.8 Step 8
Create another profile curve
Draw a 2D profile using menu option: Basic >> Line >> Screen Position
• Ensure Implicit mode is off. Press ‘I’ to enable/disable implicit mode
• Right click on canvas, select Enter Coordinates

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 214


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 17-9: Selecting option Enter Coordinates

Enter the below coordinates


X = -22, Y = 0, Z = 60 and click OK
• Then press keyboard “T”, now line creation dialog will open (input below values) and click
OK
X = -20, Y = 0, Z = 0
• Again, press keyboard “T”, now line creation dialog will open
(input below values) and click OK
X = 0, Y = 20, Z = 0
and press Enter key to complete the operation
• Now, go to Basic >> Line >> Screen Position
• Ensure Implicit mode is off. Press ‘I’ to enable/disable implicit
mode
• Right click in workspace, select Enter Coordinates
Figure 17-10: Profile curve
X = -22, Y = 0, Z = 60 and click OK
• Then press keyboard “T”, now line creation dialog will open (input below values)
X = 0, Y = 43, Z = 0
• Then, Enable Implicit mode by pressing ‘I’ and implicitly pick the point to join two lines.

17.2.9 Step 9
As the profile with curves is complete, now build a Solid.
• Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid’s menu: Solid >> Slab
• System prompts to select the set of curves (profile)
• Right click the mouse button and choose chain selection from the list to select set of
continuous curves automatically.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 215


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• In case, any curve is left in the loop/chain, use left mouse click on the curve to select it.
• Now Slab creation options dialog will open, select “One Direction”, Thickness1 =30, and
check ‘Reverse Direction’ option, then click OK or hit Enter to complete the operation.
It will create a solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree.

17.2.10 Step 10
Use the Boolean Union operation to join all created Solid Part
To join the solid part, use the Boolean operation
• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> union of solid
• Select the parts by mouse left click (Note: Un-blank all the slab entities)
• Then press Enter key
• Don’t forgot to save part (muz file).
Result after joining all solid slabs will be a solid object as shown

Figure 17-11: Union of Solid slabs

17.2.11 Step 11
Plot Configurator 2D Drawing Sheet (Optional step)
Open plot Configurator for creating the 2D drawing views and detailing
• Go to File >> Plot Configurator
Now plot configurator application will open in new window
• Setup Page, using plot configurator menu option: File >> Page Setup
• Fill the details (Paper Size- A2) then click OK. Mostly, A2 sheet is used in Industry
• For 2D Drawing go to View >> Standard
• Go to View >> Isometric
• Drag the area for isometric view at the viewport.
• Go to View >> Auto Fit
• Use the various options in the Dimensions to create linear, radial dimensions.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 216


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Use the Section view (View->Section) to generate the sections on the solid part.
• Complete the Title Block with the desired information and save the drawing sheet to desired
MUP file.

Figure 17-12: Plot Confugurator - 2D drawing

17.2.12 Step 12
Export to STL format (Optional step)
• Open the completed model in CollabCAD
• Export the model to STL file format using: File >> Export >> STL
• Then press Shift + B to select all the solid entities and the STL file by any desired name

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 217


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 18. Assembly Example: Stuffing Box Assembly

18.1 Introduction
This model is designed in CollabCAD 2.5.0 Windows version. This model will help CAD beginners
to acquire knowledge of 3D modelling using CollabCAD. Users will be able to create the same
model by following the steps given in this tutorial. This model is quite simple for learning 3D
modeling and detailing in CollabCAD.

18.2 Parts of Assembly


• Body
• Gland
• Bush
• Stud
• Nut (M12)
• Rod

18.3 Modeling Steps


User may use various shot cut while modeling
• Use Ctrl+Left mouse button to apply dynamics. During dynamics mode the geometry
can be rotated, translated, and zoomed by dragging the mouse. To rotate, drag the mouse
keeping left mouse button pressed. For translating, drag the mouse keeping right mouse
button pressed. And for zooming, drag the mouse keeping both mouse buttons pressed.
During dynamics mouse clicks won't be active for other operations.
• Use F11 to brings back the view to the orientation prior to dynamics.
• Users may view models in Isometric view and change the view before modeling as
mentioned in steps.
• Note: All the parts and assembly should be saved in the same directory.

18.3.1 Body
18.3.1.1 Install CollabCAD 2.5.0 version and open a new part
After successful installation, execute CollabCAD from Start->CollabCAD Standalone. This
will open CollabCAD application window.
• Go to File >> New >> Part design
• Give a name of the part, say ‘Body’
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
• Press Enter or Click OK

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 218


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

The User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree and tool palette will be visible to the
user.

18.3.1.2 Set the work plane to create 2D sketch or profile (set of curves)
• Select View >> Front or press CTRL+F
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit in the screen. X-Y coordinate system marker will be
visible in the center

18.3.1.3 Create a rectangular profile


• Create a rectangle
• Go to Basic >> Rectangle>> Diagonal Coordinates
XT1 = -70, YT1=-50
XT2 = 70, YT2=50, Depth = 0

Figure 18-1: Rectangular profile

18.3.1.4 Create Solid Slab


Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid menu
• Create a solid on the profile curves using menu option: Solid >> Slab
• System will prompt to select the set of curves (profile)
• Select rectangular profile using left mouse click
• Now Slab creation options dialog will open,
• Select “One Direction” and Thickness1 =15 and click OK or press Enter key to complete
the operation.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 219


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

It will create a solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree.
User can use shaded mode for better visualization. Press ‘S’ to shift to shadded mode and press ‘R’ to
refresh

Figure 18-2: Solid Slab

18.3.1.5 Create a circular Profile


Now create a 2D curve entity, circle (User may blank existing entities on the canvas(optional))
• Go to Basic >> Arc >> Center & Radius >>Key in
C1 (X, Y, Z, Radius) = (0, 0, 15, 33)

18.3.1.6 Create Solid Slab


Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid menu
• Create a solid on the profile curves using menu option: Solid >> Slab
• System will prompt to select the set of curves (profile)
• Select circular profile using left mouse click
• Now Slab creation options dialog will open,
• Select “One Direction” and Thickness1 =50 and click OK or press Enter key to complete
the operation.
It will create a solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 220


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-3: Created circular slab on rectangular slab

18.3.1.7 Create 2D Profiles


• Create a 2D curve entity, Ellipse. Go to Curves >> Ellipse >> Key in
• Create an ellipse with below parameters
View = Front
XT = 0, YT = 0, ZT = 65
Half Major axis = 60
Half Minor axis = 36
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = 360
Rotation = 0
• Now, create two circles, Go to Basic >> Arc >> Center & Radius >> key in
• Create circles with following parameters:
C1 (XT, YT, ZT, Radius) = (-42, 0, 65, 4.5)
C2 (XT, YT, ZT, Radius) = (42, 0, 65, 4.5)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 221


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-4: Ellipse with two circles

18.3.1.8 Create Solid Slab


Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid menu
• Create a solid on the profile curves using menu option: Solid >> Slab
• System will prompt to select the set of curves (profile)
• Select elliptical profile using left mouse click
• Also select the circles (islands) by left click and hit Enter
• Now Slab creation options dialog will open,
• Select “One Direction” and Thickness1 =15 and click OK or press Enter key to complete
the operation.
It will create a solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree.

18.3.1.9 Perform Solid Union


To join solids, use the Boolean operation
• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> Union
• Select all the three slabs (rectangular, circular and elliptical) created in previous steps
• and press Enter
This will join slabs into a single object, and it will add an object to the model tree.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 222


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-5: Union of Solid Slabs

18.3.1.10 Create Solid Cylinder and Perform Boolean Difference


• Go to Solid >> Cylinder >> Key in
X1 = 0, Y1= 0, Z1 = 15
X2 = 0, Y2= 0, Z2 = 90, Radius = 21
• To make shape hollow (remove material) from the solid part, use Boolean Difference
operation
• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> Difference
• Select Solid Object as the base solid for difference i.e. part to be retained using left mouse
click
• Now, click the part to be removed i.e. Cylinder
• Then press Enter key
This will remove the desired solid part from the object and resultant object will be added to the
model tree.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 223


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-6: Boolean Difference operation

18.3.1.11 Create another Solid Cylinder and Perform Boolean Difference


• Go to Solid >> Cylinder >> Key in
X1 = 0, Y1= 0, Z1 = 20
X2 = 0, Y2= 0, Z2 = -20, Radius = 16.5

Figure 18-7: Solid Object with a Cylinder for Boolean Difference

To make shape hollow (remove material) from the solid part, use the Boolean operation
• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> Difference

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 224


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Select Solid Object as the base solid for difference i.e. part to be retained using left mouse
click
• Now, click the part to be removed i.e. Cylinder and press Enter key
This will remove the desired solid part from the object and resultant object will be added to the
model tree. Save the part using File >> Save

Figure 18-8: Body: a part of the Stuffing box assembly

18.3.2 Gland
18.3.2.1 Open the New Part
• Go to File >> New >> Part design
• Give a name to the part, say Gland
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
• Press Enter or Click OK
The User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree and tool palette are visible.

18.3.2.2 Set the work plane in which 2D sketch or profile (set of curves) is to be created
• Select View >> Front or press CTRL+F
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit in the screen. X-Y coordinate system marker will be
visible in the center.

18.3.2.3 Create Solid Cylinder


• Create a Solid Cylinder using menu option Solid >> Cylinder >> Key in
• Solid Cylinder creation dialog box will pop up.
• Create cylinder using following parameters

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 225


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

X1 = 0, Y1= 0, Z1 = 0
X2 = 0, Y2= 0, Z2 = 45, Radius = 21

18.3.2.4 Create 2D profile


• Create a 2D curve entity, Ellipse
• Go to Curves >> Ellipse >> Key in
• Ellipse creation dialog box will pop up
• Create ellipse using following parameters
View = Front
XT = 0, YT = 0, ZT = 45
Half Major axis = 60
Half Minor axis = 36
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = 360
Rotation = 0
• Now create two circular profiles
• Go to Basic >> Arc >> Center & Radius >> key in
• Create circles using following parameters:
C1 (XT, YT, ZT, Radius) = (-42, 0, 45, 6.5)
C2 (XT, YT, ZT, Radius) = (42, 0, 45, 6.5)

Figure 18-9: Added required 2D Profiles

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 226


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

18.3.2.5 Create Solid Slab


Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid menu
• Create a solid on the profile curves using menu option: Solid >> Slab
• System will prompt to select the set of curves (profile)
• Select elliptical profile using left mouse click
• Also select circles (islands) by left click and hit Enter
• Now Slab creation options dialog will open,
• Select “One Direction” and Thickness1 =15 and click OK or press Enter key to
complete the operation.
It will create a solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree.

Figure 18-10: Solid Slab creation

18.3.2.6 Create another Solid Cylinder


• Create a Solid Cylinder using menu option Solid >> Cylinder >> Key in
• Solid Cylinder creation dialog box will pop up.
• Create cylinder using following parameters
X1 = 0, Y1= 0, Z1 = 60
X2 = 0, Y2= 0, Z2 = 69, Radius = 25

18.3.2.7 Use the Union of Solid operation to Join all the Solid Part

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 227


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> Union


• Select all the solid entities using mouse left click and then press Enter

Figure 18-11: Result of Solid Union operation

18.3.2.8 Hide Entities


• Blank the solid entity by using option Edit >> Blank >> Select
• Now select the solid entity to blank

18.3.2.9 Change to Bottom View


• Go to View>>Single View
• A dialog box will pop up.
• Select view from drop down as Bottom View
• Press Enter
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit

18.3.2.10 Create 2D Profile for revolved solid in bottom view


• Create lines using following option
• Go to Basic >> Line >> End Coordinates
For line L1
XT1 = 0, YT1 = 0, ZT1 = 0
XT2 = 0, YT2 = 69, ZT2 = 0

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 228


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

For line L2
XT1 = 12, YT1 = 3, ZT1 = 0
XT2 = 12, YT2 = 57, ZT2 = 0
For line L3
XT1 = 23, YT1 = 57, ZT1 = 0
XT2 = 23, YT2 = 69, ZT2 = 0

Figure 18-12: 2D Profile

18.3.2.11 Create another 2D profile


• Take a point to create next entity
• Go to Basic >> Point >> End Coordinates
P1 (XT, YT, ZT) = (21, 0, 0)
• Now create a 2D profile by joining points to create lines
• Go to Basic >> Line >> Screen Position
• Enable Implicit mode (Press ‘I’ from keyboard to Enable/Disable implicit mode. Through this
mode, users can select implicitly existing points like end points of curves, vertices of surfaces
and solid. During implicit selection mode, the cursor would change to Arrow Cursor, and the
Tool Bar icon would change the color. When the mouse is moved in Implicit selection mode,
the nearest focal point of the nearby entity would be highlighted. User can now select the
desired point by simply pressing the left mouse button. This mode can be revoked by again
pressing the “I” Key or by clicking the Tool Bar icon once again.
• Press Enter on completion of each line
• Join points to get the following 2D profile

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 229


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-13: 2D Profile for revolved solid

18.3.2.12 Create Revolved Solid


• Use the Solid Revolution entity option of Solid’s menu
• Go to Solid >> Revolution and system prompt’s to first select the Axis line near the
base point
• Right click on workspace >> Global Z Axis. Z-axis will be highlighted.
• Now, System will prompt to select the cross-section curves. Right click the mouse button and
choose chain selection from the list to select set of continuous curves automatically.
• In case, any curve is left in the loop/chain, use left mouse click on the curve to select it.

Figure 18-14: Inputs for creating revolved solid

• Now Revolution Solid creation options dialog will open,


Start Angle =0.0
End Angle =360
• And click OK or press Enter key to complete the operation.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 230


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Now user will get following solid 3D shape, and entity will be added to the model tree.

Figure 18-15: Revolved solid

18.3.2.13 Boolean difference


• Firstly, Un blank all the solid entities, using Edit >>Unblank>> All
• To make the shape hollow (remove material) from the solid part, use Boolean operation
• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> Difference
• Select Solid Object as the base solid for difference i.e. part to be retained using left mouse
click
• Now, click the part to be removed i.e. revolved solid
• Then press Enter key

Figure 18-16: Result of Boolean Difference operation

This will remove the desired solid part from the object and resultant object will be added to the
model tree.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 231


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

18.3.2.14 Create Solid Blend


• Go to Solids >> Blend >> Edge
Select edge indicated in figure and press Enter key
• Now a dialog box will open, fill following parameters
Radius Type =Constant radius
Radius = 6

Figure 18-17: Edge selected to blend

Similarly, blend another edge


• Go to Solids >> Blend >> Edge
• Select edge indicated in figure and press Enter key
• Now a dialog box will open, fill following parameters
Radius Type =Constant radius
Radius = 6

Figure 18-18: Edge to blend

In figure below, edges to blend are shown in shaded mode

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 232


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-19: Edges to blend in shaded mode

• Final Gland part is shown below. Do save the part using File >> Save

Figure 18-20: Gland- Part of Stuffing box assembly

18.3.3 Bush
18.3.3.1 Open the New Part
• Go to File >> New >> Part design
• Give a name to the part, say Bush
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
• Press Enter or Click OK
The User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree and tool palette are visible.

18.3.3.2 Set the work plane to create 2D sketch or profile (set of curves)
• Select View >> Front or press CTRL+F
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit in the screen. X-Y coordinate system marker will be
visible in the center

18.3.3.3 Create Solid Cylinders

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 233


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Go to Solid >> Cylinder >> Key in


X1 = 0, Y1= 0, Z1 = 0
X2 = 0, Y2= 15, Z2 = 0, Radius = 16.5
• Create another Solid Cylinder
X1 = 0, Y1= 15, Z1 = 0
X2 = 0, Y2= 21, Z2 = 0
Radius = 21 and click OK

18.3.3.4 Union of Solid to Join Solid entities


• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> Union
• Select both cylinders using mouse left click, and press Enter

Figure 18-21: Union of two Solid Cylinders

This will join cylinders into a single object, and it will add an object to the model tree.

18.3.3.5 Blank all entities


• Blank the solid entity by using option Edit >> Blank >> Select
• Now select the solid created shape after union by left click
• Press Enter key
Note: Use Ctrl-F for front view and then press F11 to set the working plane, if view change
during model rotation

18.3.3.6 Create 2D Profile


• Create two lines
• Go to Basic >> Line >> End Coordinates

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 234


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

For line L1
XT1 = 0, YT1 = 21, ZT1 = 0
XT2 = 0, YT2 = 0, ZT2 = 0
For line L2
XT1 = 12, YT1 = 0, ZT1 = 0
XT2 = 12, YT2 = 18, ZT2 = 0
• Now, create a point using menu option: Basic >> Point >> End Coordinates
P1 (XT, YT, ZT) = (21 21, 0)
• Now, join points to create 2D Profile. Go to Basic >> Line >> Screen Position
• Enable Implicit Mode (Press ‘I’ to enable/disable implicit mode) to auto pick points. Red
marker indicates point to be selected.
• Select start and end point of the lines and press enter to complete the operation
• Note- Press Esc key or Enter key to leave the line creation control
• Join points to get the following 2D profile

Figure 18-22: 2D profile

18.3.3.7 Create Revolve Solid


Use the Solid Revolution entity option of Solid’s menu
• Go to Solid >> Revolution and system prompt’s to first select the Axis line near the
base point. This message will be available in the task bar.
• Right click on canvas and select Global Y Axis.
• Now, system will prompt to specify cross section curves.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 235


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Select lines as cross section curves. Right click the mouse button and choose chain selection
from the list to select set of continuous curves automatically.
• In case, any curve is left in the loop/chain, use left mouse click on the curve to select it.
• Press Enter
• Now Revolution Solid creation options dialog will open. Enter following parameters
Start Angle =0.0
End Angle =360
• Click OK or press Enter key to complete the operation.

Figure 18-23: Dialog box while creating Revolved Solid

18.3.3.8 Boolean difference


• Firstly, Un blank all the solid entities, using Edit >>Unblank>> All
• To make the shape hollow, use Difference Boolean operation
• Go to Solid >> Boolean >> Difference
• Click the part to be retained i.e. base solid for difference. In this case it will be the outer solid
object
• Click the part to be removed. This is the inner solid.
• Then press Enter key
This will remove the desired solid part from the object and resultant object will be added to the
model tree.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 236


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-24: Bush - a part of Stuffing box assembly

18.3.4 Nut (M12)


18.3.4.1 Open the New Part
• Go to File >> New >> Part design
• Give a name to the part, say Nut
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
• Click OK or Press Enter
The User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree and tool palette are visible.

18.3.4.2 Set the work plane to create 2D sketch or profile (set of curves)
• Select View >> Front or press CTRL+F
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit in the screen. X-Y coordinate system marker will be
visible in the center

18.3.4.3 Create 2D Profile


• Go to Basic >> Polygon >> Side
• Right Click and select Workspace origin as the Center Point
• Dialog box for polygon creation will pop up. Provide following parameters:
No. of Sides = 6
Length of Base Side = 12
• Then, create a circular profile
• Go to Basic >> Arc >> Center & Radius >> key in
View: Front
C1 (XT, YT, ZT, Radius) = (0, 0, 0, 4.5)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 237


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-25: 2D Profile for Nut

18.3.4.4 Create Solid Slab


Use the Solid Slab entity option in Solid menu
• Create a solid on the profile curves using menu option: Solid >> Slab
• System will prompt to select cross-section curves
• Select the outer polygon profile and then circular profile using left mouse click and then
press enter
• Now Slab creation options dialog will open,
• Select “One Direction” and Thickness1 =12 and click OK or press Enter key to complete
the operation.
This will add a solid slab entity to the model tree.

Figure 18-26: Nut - a part of Stuffing box assembly

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 238


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

18.3.5 Stud
18.3.5.1 Open the New Part
• Go to File >> New >> Part design
• Give a name to the part, say Stud
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
• Click OK or Press Enter
The User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree and tool palette are visible.

18.3.5.2 Set the work plane to create 2D sketch or profile (set of curves)
• Select View >> Front or press CTRL+F
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit in the screen. X-Y coordinate system marker will be
visible in the center

18.3.5.3 Create Solid Cylinder


• Go to Solid >> Cylinder >> Key in
X1 = 0, Y1= 0, Z1 = 0
X2 = 0, Y2= 90, Z2 = 0, Radius = 6
• Create another Solid Cylinder, its start and end points are,
X1 = 0, Y1= 15, Z1 = 0
X2 = 0, Y2= 20, Z2 = 0, Radius = 12

Figure 18-27: Stud- Part of Stuffing box assembly

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 239


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

18.3.6 Rod
18.3.6.1 Open the New Part
• Go to File >> New >> Part design
• Give a name to the part, say Rod
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
• Click OK or Press Enter
The User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree and tool palette are visible.

18.3.6.2 Set the work plane to create 2D sketch or profile (set of curves)
• Select View >> Front or press CTRL+F
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit in the screen. X-Y coordinate system marker will be
visible in the center

18.3.6.3 Create Solid Cylinder


• Go to Solid >> Cylinder >> Key in
X1 = 0, Y1= 0, Z1 = 0
X2 = 0, Y2= 180, Z2 = 0, Radius = 12

Figure 18-28: Rod- a part of stuffing box assembly

NOTE: Save all the parts of the Assembly in a same directory

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 240


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

18.4 Assemble Stuffing Box


18.4.1 Open an Assembly
• Go to File >> New
• Select Design mode as Assembly design
• Select Units as ‘mm’, Drafting Standard as ‘IS’
• Press Enter or select OK
The User interface with menu bar, toolbar, and Model tree
and tool palette are visible. Figure 18-29: Assembly design
parameters
18.4.2 Insert Body.muz
• Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file (Body.muz)
• Now, Fix this component. Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Fix
• Select the component ‘Body’ using mouse left click
• Press Enter
• This will apply fix constraint on the ‘Body’ component. Now, this component can’t move.

Figure 18-30: Applied fixed constraint to component 'Body'

18.4.3 Insert Bush.muz


• Set view as Bottom view
• Go to View >> Single View
• A dialog box will pop up.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 241


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Select view from drop down as Bottom View


• Press Enter
• Press F (from keyboard) to Auto fit
• Now, insert ‘Bush.muz’. Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file
(Bush.muz)

Figure 18-31: Component 'Bush' inserted to Stuffing box assembly

• Rotate ‘Bush’ component using menu option: Edit >> Rotate >> Global X Axis
• Then select the ‘Bush’ by mouse click and hit enter
• System will prompt for base point. Right click on the canvas and select Workspace Origin
and press Enter
• Now a dialog box will open for rotation parameter. Give rotation value as
Angle=90 and click OK
• Now axial align ‘Bush’ component with ‘Body’ component
• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Axial Align >> Circular/Conical Axis
• Select the circular/conical solid face of ‘Body’ using left mouse click.
• Then select the circular/conical solid face ‘Bush’ using left mouse click.
• Press Enter
• This will axially align ‘Bush’ with ‘Body’ component

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 242


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-32: Aaxially aligned ‘Bush’ with ‘Body’ component

18.4.4 Insert Gland.muz


• Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file(Gland.muz)

Figure 18-33: Inserted 'Gland' component to Stuffing box assembly

• Now, apply distance constraint on ‘Gland’ component


• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Distance >> Planer face
• Select upper circular plane face of ‘Body’ component by left mouse click.
• Select lower circular plane face of ‘Gland’ component by left mouse click.
• And hit enter. Now a dialog box will open.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 243


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-34: Planer faces selected for distance constraint

• Take distance value as Distance=30


• Click OK or press Enter.

Figure 18-35: Distance constraint applied

18.4.5 Insert Stud.muz


• Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file (Stud.muz)

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 244


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-36: Inserted ‘Stud' component to the Stuffing box assembly

• Now rotate the ‘Stud’ component. Go to Edit >> Rotate >> Global X Axis
• Then select the ‘Stud’ component by left mouse click and hit enter
• System will prompt for the base point. Right click on the canvas and select Workspace Origin
and press Enter
• Now a dialog box will open and enter rotation value as:
Angle=90, click OK
• Now blank the ‘Bush’ and ‘Gland’ component
• Go to Edit >> Blank >> Select
• Select ‘Bush’ and ‘Gland’ by left mouse click or user can select components from the model
tree.
• Press Enter
• Now, apply Coplanar constraint on “Body” and “Stud”. Go to Insert >>
Constraints >> Coplanar
• Select using left mouse click the plane of ‘Body’ which is shown in figure below
• Select using left mouse click the bottom plane of ‘Stud’ which is shown in figure below
• Press Enter
• In case, user is facing issue in plane selection, use dynamics to move solids.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 245


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-37: Plane selection for applying coplanar constraint

• Now, ‘Body’ and ‘Stud’ components are coplanar

Figure 18-38: ‘Body’ and ‘Stud’ components are coplanar

• Now, axial align stud with body component


• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Axial Align >> Circular/Conical Axis
• Select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Body’ which is shown in figure
below
• Select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Stud which is shown in figure
below
• Then press enter key.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 246


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-39: Circular face selection for axial constraint

Figure 18-40: Stud is axially alligned with 'Body' component

Similarly insert another instance of ‘Stud’ component


• Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file(‘Stud.muz’)
• Now rotate the ‘Stud’ component
• Go to Edit >> Rotate >> Global X Axis
• Then select the ‘Stud’ component by left mouse click and hit enter

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 247


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• System will prompt for the base point. Right click on the canvas and select Workspace Origin
and press Enter
• Now a dialog box will open and enter rotation value as:
Angle=90, click OK
• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Coplanar
• Select using left mouse click the plane of ‘Body’ and bottom plane of ‘Stud’ which is shown in
figure below

Figure 18-41: Plane selection for applying coplanar constraint

• Press Enter
• Now, axial align ‘Stud’ with ‘Body’ component
• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Axial Align >> Circular/Conical Axis
• Select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Body’ which is shown in figure
below
• Select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Stud’ which is shown in figure
below
• Press Enter
• This will axially align ‘Body’ and ‘Stud’ components

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 248


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-42: Circular face selection for axial constraint

Now, both Stud components are axially aligned with Body Component

Figure 18-43: both Stud components are axially aligned with Body Component

18.4.6 Insert Nut.muz


• Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file (Nut.muz)
• Now Unblank all hidden components.
• Go to Edit >> Unblank >> All
• And blank the ‘Bush’ and ‘Body’ components
• Go to Edit >> Blank >> Select

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 249


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Select ’Bush’ and ‘Body’ by left mouse click

Figure 18-44: 'Nut' Component added to Stuffing box assembly

• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Coplanar


• Select the upper plane of “Gland” by mouse click.
• Select the bottom plane of nut by mouse click.
• Then hit enter key.

Figure 18-45: Plane selection for coplanar constraint

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 250


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-46: Nut component after applying coplanar constraint

• Now, axial align ‘Nut’ with ‘Stud’ component


• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Axial Align >> Circular/Conical Axis
• Select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Stud as shown in figure below
• Then, select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Nut as shown in figure
below

Figure 18-47: Circular face selection for axially align components

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 251


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Then press enter key.

Figure 18-48: 'Stud' and 'Nut' are axially aligned

• Similarly, add another ‘Nut’ component


• Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file
• Then import Nut.muz
• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Coplanar
• Select the upper plane of “Gland” by mouse click.
• Select the bottom plane of nut by mouse click.
• Then hit enter key.
• Now, axial align ‘Nut’ with other ‘Stud’ component (Stud2)
• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Axial Align >> Circular/Conical Axis
• Select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Stud
• Then, select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Nut’
• Then press enter.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 252


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-49: Both the 'Nut' components aligned to their respective positions

18.4.7 Insert Rod


• Now Unblank all hidden components.
• Go to Edit >> Unblank >> All

• Insert ‘Rod’ Component. Go to Insert >> Component >> Import MUZ file (Rod.muz)

Figure 18-50: 'Rod' Component added to Stuffing box assembly

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 253


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

• Now rotate the ‘Rod component. Go to Edit >> Rotate >> Global X Axis
• Then select the ‘Rod’ component by left mouse click and hit enter
• System will prompt for the base point. Right click on the canvas and select Workspace Origin
and press Enter
• Now a dialog box will open and enter rotation value as:
Angle=90, click OK
• Now, axial align ‘Rod’ with ‘Body’ component
• Go to Insert >> Constraints >> Axial Align >> Circular/Conical Axis
• Select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Body’ as shown in figure below
• Then, select by left mouse click the circular/conical solid face of ‘Rod’ as shown in figure
below
Then press enter.

Figure 18-51: Circular face selection for axially aligning components

Now ‘Rod’ is axially aligned with ‘Body’. This completes the Stuffing box assembly. Save the
assembly with part models in the same directory.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 254


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-52: Stuffing Box Assembly

18.5 2D Drawing of Assembly in Plot Configurator


• Open plot Configurator for creating the drawing views and detailing
• Go to File >> Plot Configurator
• Now plot configurator application will open in new window
• Setup Page as required, Go to File >> Page Setup
• Set page size as A2, as A2 Sheet is used in Industry
• Click OK or press Enter
• Now, go to View >> Standard
• Select Layout as ‘First Angle 4 views’
• This will create four views of the assembly on the drawing sheet
• Now, go to View >> Auto Fit to fit drawing in different view boxes
• Use the Section view (View->Section) to generate the sections of the solid part. Follow the
instructions that will be displayed on the task bar of the Plot Configurator.
• Complete the Title Block with the desired information

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 255


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Figure 18-53: 2D Drawing sheet of Stuffing Box assembly

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 256


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 19. 3D Models Designed using CollabCAD


Below some sample models designed/ assembled in CollabCAD

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 257


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 258


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 259


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 260


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

Chapter 20. Resources and References


• National Informatics Centre: https://www.nic.in
• Atal Innovation Mission: https://aim.gov.in/index.php
• CollabCAD Home page: https://collabcad.gov.in
• e-CollabCAD Application: https://collabcad.gov.in/eCollabCAD
• CollabCAD Web Help: https://collabcad.gov.in/CollabCADHelp/index.jsp
• 3D printing reference by AIM/ATL: https://aim.gov.in/3D-Printing.php
• Java3D API: https://www.oracle.com/java/technologies/javase/java-3d.html
• OpenCASCADE C++ Geometry Kernel: https://www.opencascade.org
• Jython: http://www.jython.org
• Python: http://www.python.org
• Jython Essentials, Samuele Pedroni, Noel Rappin., O'Reilly and Associates., 2002.
• Jython for Java Programmers,Robert Bill.,New Riders.,2001.
• The Definitive Guide to Jython: Python for the Java Platform (Expert's Voice in Software
Development), Josh Juneau, Jim Baker, Victor Ng, Leao Soto, Frank Wierzbicki, Paperback,
2010.
• Python Programming with the Java Class Libraries: A Tutorial for Building Web and
Enterprise Applications, Richard Hightower, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 2002.

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 261


CollabCAD 3D Modeling Tool

CollabCAD Group, National Informatics Centre


Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology
A-Block, CGO Complex, Lodhi Road
New Delhi, India 110003
collabcad@nic.in, collabcad-atl@nic.in
https://collabcad.gov.in

ISBN 978-81-909457-4-5

CollabCAD, National Informatics Centre 262

You might also like